WO2010084985A1 - Setting input assisting device, printer body monitoring device, and printer - Google Patents

Setting input assisting device, printer body monitoring device, and printer Download PDF

Info

Publication number
WO2010084985A1
WO2010084985A1 PCT/JP2010/050926 JP2010050926W WO2010084985A1 WO 2010084985 A1 WO2010084985 A1 WO 2010084985A1 JP 2010050926 W JP2010050926 W JP 2010050926W WO 2010084985 A1 WO2010084985 A1 WO 2010084985A1
Authority
WO
WIPO (PCT)
Prior art keywords
setting
unit
display unit
printing
main body
Prior art date
Application number
PCT/JP2010/050926
Other languages
French (fr)
Japanese (ja)
Inventor
勝彦 林
徹 高橋
雅 大木
Original Assignee
三菱重工業株式会社
Priority date (The priority date is an assumption and is not a legal conclusion. Google has not performed a legal analysis and makes no representation as to the accuracy of the date listed.)
Filing date
Publication date
Priority claimed from JP2009013451A external-priority patent/JP2010167713A/en
Priority claimed from JP2010012243A external-priority patent/JP2010188722A/en
Application filed by 三菱重工業株式会社 filed Critical 三菱重工業株式会社
Publication of WO2010084985A1 publication Critical patent/WO2010084985A1/en

Links

Images

Classifications

    • BPERFORMING OPERATIONS; TRANSPORTING
    • B41PRINTING; LINING MACHINES; TYPEWRITERS; STAMPS
    • B41FPRINTING MACHINES OR PRESSES
    • B41F33/00Indicating, counting, warning, control or safety devices
    • B41F33/02Arrangements of indicating devices, e.g. counters
    • BPERFORMING OPERATIONS; TRANSPORTING
    • B41PRINTING; LINING MACHINES; TYPEWRITERS; STAMPS
    • B41FPRINTING MACHINES OR PRESSES
    • B41F33/00Indicating, counting, warning, control or safety devices
    • B41F33/0009Central control units
    • BPERFORMING OPERATIONS; TRANSPORTING
    • B41PRINTING; LINING MACHINES; TYPEWRITERS; STAMPS
    • B41FPRINTING MACHINES OR PRESSES
    • B41F33/00Indicating, counting, warning, control or safety devices
    • B41F33/0036Devices for scanning or checking the printed matter for quality control
    • HELECTRICITY
    • H04ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04NPICTORIAL COMMUNICATION, e.g. TELEVISION
    • H04N23/00Cameras or camera modules comprising electronic image sensors; Control thereof
    • H04N23/90Arrangement of cameras or camera modules, e.g. multiple cameras in TV studios or sports stadiums

Definitions

  • the present invention includes a setting input auxiliary device that assists in inputting settings of a printing press main body, a printing press main body monitoring device that monitors the printing press main body, and the setting input auxiliary device or the printing press main body monitoring device. It relates to a printing machine.
  • Patent Document 1 discloses a monitor device that is easy to see during normal use and easy to maintain during abnormal use by providing a monitor for normal use and a monitor for abnormal use separately.
  • the operator when an operator operates the printing press control device to control each part of the printing press main body, the operator visually checks and confirms the portion of the printing press main body to be controlled, It may be necessary to operate the controller.
  • the printing machine main body has an air ejection device that blows air onto a recording medium.
  • the operator adjusts the air blown to the recording medium by operating the printing press control device.
  • the operator needs to leave the printing press control device and actually observe the air ejection device.
  • the first operator who operates the printing press control device and the device to be controlled are visually checked and the state of the control target device is first described. There may be a need for two operators to communicate with a second operator.
  • the procedure for operating the printing press control device and the control target device are visually controlled away from the printing press control device. It is necessary for the operator to repeatedly execute the two procedures of confirming the state of the target device.
  • the conventional printer control device cannot sufficiently reduce the amount of operator work required to control the printer main body.
  • the present invention has been made in view of the above, and an object thereof is to reduce the amount of work for an operator.
  • a setting input auxiliary device is a part of the printer main body that is provided in a printer main body that performs printing on a recording medium.
  • a setting input auxiliary device to which a camera that captures an image of a setting target and at least one display unit that displays information necessary for controlling the setting target are connected, wherein the setting input auxiliary device
  • a setting start operation auxiliary area in which an image for assisting an operation for starting setting of an object is displayed is displayed on the display unit, and based on an operation for starting setting of the setting object from now on, the setting target video,
  • a setting operation assisting area for displaying an image for assisting input of a setting value for controlling the setting target is displayed on the display unit.
  • a printing press control apparatus in a printing press main body that performs printing on a recording medium, and is a part of the printing press main body.
  • a printing press control device to which a camera that images a setting target and at least one display unit that displays information necessary to control the setting target is connected, wherein the printing press control device
  • a setting start operation auxiliary area in which an image for assisting an operation for starting setting of an object is displayed is displayed on the display unit, and based on an operation for starting setting of the setting object from now on, the setting target video,
  • a setting operation assisting area for displaying an image for assisting input of a setting value for controlling the setting target is displayed on the display unit.
  • a printing machine includes a printing unit that performs printing on a recording medium, a paper feeding unit that supplies the recording medium to the printing unit, A reversing unit for reversing the recording surface of the recording medium, a paper discharging unit for discharging the recording medium printed by the printing unit, the printing unit, the paper feeding unit, and the reversing unit, A printer that is connected to at least one of the paper discharge units and that captures a setting target and at least one display unit that displays information necessary to control the setting target
  • the printing press displays a setting start operation auxiliary area in which an image for assisting an operation for starting the setting target setting is displayed on the display unit, and starts the setting target setting from now on. Based on the video to be set and the And displaying setting and assist area that displays an image for assisting the input of the setting value for controlling a constant object to the display unit.
  • the setting input auxiliary device acquires a setting operation start signal when an operation for starting the setting of the setting target is performed, and acquires the setting operation start signal. It is desirable to display the setting operation auxiliary area on the display unit.
  • the operator can set the setting value while checking the setting target image at hand without leaving the setting input auxiliary device.
  • the control target can be set by inputting to the setting operation auxiliary area. Therefore, the setting input auxiliary device, the printing press control device, and the printing press according to the present invention according to the present invention can reduce the amount of work for the operator.
  • the camera is provided in each of the plurality of setting objects, and a setting of a specific setting object that is one of the plurality of setting objects is set.
  • a specific setting operation start signal that is one of the setting operation start signals is acquired as a signal to be acquired when starting
  • the specific setting target is used as the specific setting target video and the setting operation auxiliary area. It is desirable to display a specific setting operation auxiliary area for displaying an image for assisting input of a setting value for control on the display unit.
  • the setting input auxiliary device and the printing press according to the present invention automatically display a specific setting target video on a display unit from among a plurality of setting target videos. Therefore, if the setting input auxiliary device and the printing press according to the present invention are used, the operator does not need to manually switch the video. Thereby, the setting input auxiliary device and the printing press according to the present invention can more suitably reduce the work amount of the operator.
  • the setting operation start signal when the setting operation start signal is acquired, it is desirable to display a preset selection unit which is a part for selecting the preset setting value on the display unit.
  • the setting input auxiliary device can be set without inputting the setting value in the setting operation auxiliary area by the operator operating the preset selection unit and selecting the preset value illustrated.
  • the target setting can be completed. Therefore, the setting input auxiliary device and the printing press according to the present invention can reduce the amount of work for the operator.
  • the setting input auxiliary device can check the video of each part of the printing press body even after printing is finished.
  • the state of each part of the printing press main body can be displayed from a video display device, for example, a personal computer, which is arranged at a location away from the equipment provided with the printing press. Can be confirmed.
  • a video display device for example, a personal computer
  • a printing unit that constitutes the printing machine main body and performs printing on the recording medium includes a reversing unit that reverses a recording surface of the recording medium, and the reversing unit that travels the reversing unit.
  • a reversing unit air ejecting device that ejects air toward the recording medium, and the camera guides the air ejected by the reversing unit air ejecting device out of the reversing unit.
  • the setting input auxiliary device is a signal for adjusting the flow rate of the air ejected by the reversing unit air ejecting device, and is one of the setting operation start signals.
  • the setting input auxiliary device and the printing press according to the present invention can check the video of the reversing unit at hand without leaving the setting input auxiliary device and visually observing the reversing unit. Can be set in the setting operation auxiliary area to set the reversing unit. Therefore, the setting input auxiliary device and the printing press according to the present invention can reduce the amount of work for the operator.
  • the storage means stores specific information for extracting a portion where a specific recording medium is imaged from an image where a plurality of recording media are sequentially traveling. It is desirable. According to a preferred aspect of the present invention, when an operation for designating a specific recording medium is performed from among the plurality of recording media, the specific image is captured from an image captured by the camera based on the specific information. It is preferable to extract a portion where the recording medium is imaged and display an image of the portion where the specific recording medium is imaged on the display unit.
  • the setting input auxiliary device can display a video image of a specific recording medium on the display unit.
  • the operator can confirm the state of printing on the recording medium by the printer main body by looking back at the video displayed on the display unit. Therefore, the setting input auxiliary device according to the present invention can provide the operator with the details of the state of the recording medium when the recording medium travels through each part of the printing machine main body.
  • the camera captures an image based on the specific information. It is preferable that a part where the specific recording medium is imaged is specified for each camera from a video, and a video of a part where the specific recording medium is captured is displayed on the display unit for each camera.
  • the setting input auxiliary device can display the video image of the recording medium on the display unit so as to follow the trajectory of the specific recording medium.
  • the operator can confirm the state of printing on the recording medium by the printer main body by looking back at the video displayed on the display unit. Therefore, the setting input auxiliary device according to the present invention can provide the operator with the details of the state of the recording medium when the recording medium travels through each part of the printing machine main body.
  • a printing condition when the specific recording medium is imaged is displayed on the display unit. It is desirable to make it.
  • the setting input auxiliary device can provide the operator with the video and the printing condition information on the same screen. Therefore, if the setting input auxiliary device according to the present invention is used, the operator can easily find the relationship between the video and the printing condition when the video is captured. For example, if there is a problem with the recording medium that has run through the printing machine main body, the setting input auxiliary device according to the present invention allows the operator to check the situation when the problem has occurred on the video, and at that time It becomes easier to identify the cause of the failure by looking at the printing conditions.
  • the image processing apparatus includes a storage unit that stores an image captured by the camera and is selected when a specific setting value is selected from the list of setting values displayed on the preset selection unit. It is desirable that an image captured by the camera when the recording medium travels through the printing press main body with the set value is acquired from the storage unit and displayed on the display unit.
  • the operator can determine whether or not the printing on the recording medium with the selected setting value is good by looking at the video displayed on the display unit. Thereby, if the setting input auxiliary device according to the present invention is used, the operator can more easily find a good setting value.
  • an image currently captured by the camera is displayed on the display unit together with an image captured by the camera when the recording medium travels through the printer main body at the selected setting value. It is desirable to display.
  • the operator compares the two images, and the image currently captured by the camera is the selected set value and the recording medium is the main body of the printing machine.
  • the preset selection unit can be operated so that the video is better than the video captured by the camera when the vehicle travels (video in which the flutter of the recording medium can be reduced).
  • a plurality of the setting values included in the list displayed in the preset selection unit are rearranged based on printing conditions and displayed on the display unit, and the plurality of the setting values It is preferable to perform at least one of performing a refinement search with respect to the print condition and displaying the set value corresponding to the refinement search on the display unit.
  • the setting input auxiliary device can preferentially display setting values having printing conditions close to those of the current print job by the above configuration. Therefore, if the setting input auxiliary device according to the present invention is used, the operator can more easily find a desired setting value.
  • the printing conditions include: a speed at which the recording medium travels through the printing machine body, a planar dimension of the recording medium, a thickness of the recording medium, and a type of the recording medium And at least one of the number of colors used when the printing machine main body performs printing on the recording medium.
  • At least one printing machine main body monitoring device is provided in a printing machine main body that performs printing on a recording medium, and images each part of the printing machine main body.
  • a display unit for displaying the video acquired from the camera and includes the setting input auxiliary device described above, and is a video captured by the camera, corresponding to the state of the printing press main body. The displayed video is emphasized and displayed on the display unit.
  • a printing press control apparatus is connected to a printing press main body that performs printing on a recording medium, and controls each part of the printing press main body.
  • a printer that is provided with at least one camera that is provided in the main body of the printing machine and that captures the respective parts of the main body of the printing machine, and a display unit that displays an image acquired from the camera.
  • a control device wherein the printing press control device emphasizes and displays an image captured by the camera corresponding to a state of the printing press main body on the display unit.
  • a printing machine includes a printing unit that performs printing on a recording medium, and a paper feeding unit that supplies the recording medium to the printing unit.
  • a reversing unit for reversing a recording surface of the recording medium
  • a paper discharging unit for discharging the recording medium printed by the printing unit, the printing unit, the paper feeding unit, and the reversing unit
  • a printer that is provided in at least one of the printer unit and the paper discharge unit and that captures an image of a target, and a display unit that displays an image acquired from the camera. Is an image picked up by the camera and corresponding to the state of the printer main body, and is displayed on the display unit with emphasis.
  • the video corresponding to the state of the printing press main body is a video corresponding to a signal indicating the current state of the printing press main body or various signals for controlling the printing press main body. Is desirable.
  • the printing machine main body monitoring device displays a video corresponding to the state of the printing machine main body among a plurality of videos captured by the camera. It is desirable to display it on the display unit with more emphasis.
  • the printing press main body monitoring device, the printing press control device, and the printing press according to the present invention automatically emphasize the video displayed on the display unit without the operator switching the video displayed on the display unit by himself. To display.
  • the printing press main body monitoring device, the printing press control device, and the printing press according to the present invention can reduce the trouble that the operator has manually switched the video displayed on the display unit.
  • At least one of the plurality of cameras is provided in a paper feeding unit of the printing machine main body, images the paper feeding unit, and is one of the various signals,
  • a print start signal for starting a new print job is input, the image of the paper feed unit is displayed before the recording medium starts to be supplied from the paper feed unit to the printing unit of the printer main body. It is desirable to display on the display unit with emphasis over other images.
  • the printing machine main body may stop and enter a failure occurrence mode. If the printing press main body is in the failure occurrence mode, the operator needs to perform an operation of discharging the recording medium remaining inside the printing press main body or an operation of canceling the failure occurrence mode of the printing press main body.
  • the printing machine main body monitoring apparatus can allow the operator to check the image of the paper feeding unit before the recording medium starts to be supplied from the paper feeding unit to the printing unit.
  • the operator can confirm whether or not the recording medium remains in the paper feeding unit before the recording medium starts to be supplied from the paper feeding unit to the printing unit.
  • the printing press main body monitoring apparatus can suppress the possibility that printing is started in a state where the recording medium is discontinuously left in the paper feeding unit during the previous printing.
  • the printing press main body monitoring device reduces the labor of the operator required to discharge the recording medium remaining inside the printing press main body and to release the malfunction occurrence mode of the printing press main body. it can.
  • one of the various signals and a paper feed unit failure occurrence signal for determining that a failure has occurred in the paper feed unit is input. Then, it is desirable that the video acquired from the camera that captures the paper feeding unit is displayed on the display unit with emphasis over other video.
  • the printer main body monitor apparatus automatically displays an image of the paper feeding unit on the display unit when a problem occurs in the paper feeding unit. As a result, the operator can quickly grasp that a failure has occurred in the sheet feeding unit, and can check the image of the sheet feeding unit in which the failure has occurred without performing an operation of selecting an image.
  • a failure occurrence signal that is one of the various signals and is the signal for determining that a failure has occurred in the printing press main body.
  • the printing press main body monitoring apparatus when a malfunction occurs during the operation of the printing press body, automatically highlights the image of the site where the malfunction has occurred and displays it on the display unit. Thereby, the printing press main body monitor apparatus according to the present invention can reduce the trouble of manually switching the video displayed on the display unit by the operator.
  • the printing press main body monitoring device can reduce the labor of the operator.
  • At least one of the plurality of cameras is provided in a reversing unit that reverses a recording surface of the recording medium, images the reversing unit, and operates the printer main body.
  • an inversion unit failure occurrence signal is input that is one of the various signals and is used to determine that a failure has occurred in the inversion unit, an image acquired from the camera that images the inversion unit It is desirable to display on the display unit with emphasis over other images.
  • the printing press main body monitor device automatically displays the video of the reversing unit on the display unit when a problem occurs in the reversing unit.
  • the operator can quickly grasp that a problem has occurred in the reversing unit, and can check the video of the reversing unit in which the problem has occurred without performing an operation of selecting an image.
  • At least one of the plurality of cameras is provided in a paper discharge unit that discharges the recording medium, images the paper discharge unit, and the printer main body is in operation.
  • a paper discharge unit failure occurrence signal for determining that a failure has occurred in the paper discharge unit is input as one of the various signals, the signal is acquired from the camera that images the paper discharge unit. It is desirable to display an image on the display unit with emphasis over other images.
  • the printing press main body monitor apparatus automatically displays the image of the paper discharge unit on the display unit when a problem occurs in the paper discharge unit.
  • the operator can quickly grasp that a failure has occurred in the paper discharge unit, and can check the video of the paper discharge unit in which the failure has occurred without performing an operation of selecting an image.
  • an image corresponding to the various signals is displayed on the display unit in an enlarged manner than the other images, so that the images corresponding to the various signals are displayed more than the other images. It is desirable to emphasize.
  • the printing press main body monitor apparatus can emphasize the video corresponding to the various signals more than the other video.
  • only the video corresponding to the various signals is displayed in an enlarged manner in the entire display area of the display unit, so that the video corresponding to the various signals is emphasized more than the other video. It is desirable.
  • the printing press main body monitor apparatus can emphasize the video corresponding to the various signals more than the other video.
  • the printing press main body monitoring apparatus can check the video of each part of the printing press main body even after printing is finished.
  • a video display device disposed at a location away from the equipment in which the printing press is provided, for example, a personal computer, each part of the printing press main body. You can check the situation.
  • the present invention can reduce the amount of operator work.
  • FIG. 1 is an external view showing the entire printing press.
  • FIG. 2 is a cross-sectional view showing the paper feeding device cut along a plane perpendicular to the rotation axis of the cylinder group.
  • FIG. 3 is a configuration diagram schematically showing the display unit when the reference screen is displayed.
  • FIG. 4 is a configuration diagram schematically showing the display unit when the setting item list is displayed.
  • FIG. 5 is a configuration diagram schematically illustrating a display unit when the setting screen of the first embodiment is displayed.
  • FIG. 6 is a configuration diagram schematically showing the control device.
  • FIG. 7 is a configuration diagram schematically showing the display unit when the tracking screen is displayed.
  • FIG. 8 is a configuration diagram schematically showing the display unit when the enlarged display tracking screen is displayed.
  • FIG. 1 is an external view showing the entire printing press.
  • FIG. 2 is a cross-sectional view showing the paper feeding device cut along a plane perpendicular to the rotation axis of the cylinder group.
  • FIG. 3 is
  • FIG. 9 is a configuration diagram schematically illustrating a display unit when the setting screen of the second embodiment is displayed.
  • FIG. 10 is a configuration diagram schematically illustrating the display unit when the remark display unit is displayed on the setting screen of the second embodiment.
  • FIG. 11 is a configuration diagram schematically showing the display unit when the comparison setting screen is displayed.
  • FIG. 12 is a configuration diagram schematically showing the display unit when the camera control screen is displayed.
  • FIG. 13 is a configuration diagram schematically showing a display unit during four-screen display.
  • FIG. 14 is a configuration diagram schematically showing a display unit during one-screen display.
  • FIG. 15 is a configuration diagram schematically showing a display unit during pop-up display.
  • FIG. 16 is a configuration diagram schematically illustrating a display unit when an emphasis frame is displayed.
  • FIG. 1 is an external view showing the entire printing press.
  • the printing press 1 includes a printing press main body 900 and a printing press control apparatus 200.
  • the printing press main body 900 will be described as an example of a sheet-fed printing press.
  • the printing machine main body 900 includes a paper feeding unit 910, a printing unit 930, a reversing unit 950, and a paper discharge unit 960.
  • the paper feeding unit 910 includes a paper stacking device 911 and a paper feeding device 920.
  • the paper stacking device 911 stacks paper S as recording media on which printing is performed.
  • the recording medium includes, for example, a film and a sheet whose surface is coated with aluminum.
  • the paper feeding device 920 guides the paper S guided from the paper stacking device 911 to the printing unit 930.
  • the printing unit 930 performs printing on the paper S.
  • the paper S printed by the printing unit 930 is discharged to the paper discharge unit 960.
  • a first printing unit 931, a second printing unit 932, a third printing unit 933, and a fourth printing unit 934 are arranged in order from the paper feeding unit 910 toward the paper discharge unit 960. Configured. Each printing unit from the first printing unit 931 to the fourth printing unit 934 prints, for example, a single color such as cyan, magenta, yellow, and black in an overlapping manner.
  • the printing unit 930 has a cylinder group 940 for each printing unit.
  • the cylinder group 940 includes, for example, an intermediate cylinder 941, a plate cylinder 942, a blanket cylinder 943, and an impression cylinder 944.
  • the body group 940 is formed in a cylindrical shape, and is provided on the frame so that each body can rotate about its center axis.
  • the third printing unit 933 does not include the intermediate cylinder 941.
  • FIG. 2 is a cross-sectional view showing the paper feeding device cut along a plane orthogonal to the rotation axis of the cylinder group.
  • the paper feeding device 920 is disposed between the paper stacking device 911 and the printing unit 930 of the printer main body 900 shown in FIG. As shown in FIG. 2, the paper feeding device 920 includes a guide plate 921, a front pad 922, a paper pressing member 923, a swing gripper 924, and a paper feeding device air ejection device 170.
  • the guide plate 921 is provided along the traveling direction of the paper S from the paper supply unit 910 toward the printing unit 930.
  • the guide plate 921 is disposed so that the end on the printing unit 930 side faces the side peripheral portion of the intermediate cylinder 941 of the first printing unit 931.
  • the front pad 922 is provided between the end of the guide plate 921 and the side periphery of the intermediate body 941.
  • the front pad 922 is provided so as to protrude from the surface of the guide plate 921 on which the paper S travels.
  • the surface on which the paper S travels is referred to as the travel surface of the guide plate 921.
  • the paper S travels on the guide plate 921, and the position of the gripping side St is adjusted when the gripping side St hits the front contact 922.
  • the paper pressing member 923 is provided at a position facing the traveling surface of the guide plate 921.
  • the paper pressing member 923 is, for example, a plate-like member that curves toward the front pad 922 as the guide plate 921 is approached. Further, depending on the type of the paper S, the paper pressing member 923 may be a roller having an axis parallel to the rotation axis of the intermediate cylinder 941 as a rotation axis.
  • a gap is formed between the paper pressing member 923 and the guide plate 921, and the paper S travels on the guide plate 921 toward the intermediate drum 941 through this gap.
  • the paper pressing member 923 guides the paper S toward the guide plate 921 by contacting the paper S passing through the gap. Thereby, the paper pressing member 923 suppresses the possibility that the paper S is lifted from the guide plate 921.
  • the paper pressing member 923 is attached to an elevating device 923 a that moves the paper pressing member 923 in a direction approaching the guide plate 921 and in a direction away from the guide plate 921.
  • the size of the gap between the guide plate 921 and the paper pressing member 923 is adjusted by the lifting device 923a.
  • the larger the thickness of the paper S the larger the size of the gap.
  • the thickness of the paper S is the dimension of the paper S in the direction connecting the guide plate 921 and the paper pressing member 923.
  • the swing gripper 924 is disposed between the guide plate 921 and the front pad 922 and the intermediate cylinder 941 of the first printing unit 931.
  • the swing gripper 924 grips the paper S positioned by the front pad 922.
  • the swing gripper 924 rotates about a rotation shaft 924a parallel to the respective rotation shafts of the body group 940, so that the gripper side claw 924b approaches the intermediate body 941 side from the end of the guide plate 921. It moves to deliver the paper S to the intermediate cylinder 941.
  • the swing gripper 924 guides the grip side St of the paper S guided from the paper feeding unit 910 shown in FIG. Accordingly, the paper feeding device 920 sends the paper S from the paper feeding unit 910 to the printing unit 930.
  • the air ejecting device 170 for the paper feeding device is arranged along the guide plate 921 between the guide plate 921 and the paper S in the running direction of the paper S from the jet port 171 opening in the running surface of the guide plate 921. Erupt.
  • the air pressure between the guide plate 921 and the paper S is lower than the air pressure on the opposite side of the guide plate 921 with the paper S as a boundary. Therefore, the paper S is drawn toward the guide plate 921 side. In this way, the paper jetting device air jet device 170 sucks the paper S traveling on the guide plate 921 toward the guide plate 921, and suppresses the possibility that the paper S is lifted from the guide plate 921.
  • the paper discharge unit 960 includes a reverse intermediate cylinder 951, a reverse double cylinder 952, and a reverse cylinder 953 in order of the traveling direction of the paper S that travels from the paper supply unit 910 toward the paper discharge unit 960.
  • the inversion intermediate cylinder 951, the inversion double cylinder 952, and the inversion cylinder 953 are each formed in a cylindrical shape, and are provided on the frame so that each cylinder can rotate about its central axis.
  • the reversing part 950 is a tail edge side Sb that is an end part on the opposite side to the tail side St that is the end part of the paper S that is supported by the reversing intermediate cylinder 951 and the reversing double cylinder 952.
  • the reversing drum 953 holds.
  • the reversing unit 950 uses the tail edge side Sb of the first printing unit 931 and the second printing unit 932 in the end portion of the paper S as a new gripping side St, and the reversing cylinder 953 presses the pressure of the third printing unit 933. Pass to the barrel 944.
  • the reversing unit 950 changes the surface of the two surfaces of the paper S that contacts the blanket cylinder 943 at the impression cylinder 944 of the second printing unit 932 to the side that contacts the side periphery of the impression cylinder 944. Then, the paper S is delivered to the impression cylinder 944 of the third printing unit 933. In this way, the reversing unit 950 reverses the recording surface, which is the surface on which printing is performed, among the surfaces of the paper S between the second printing unit 932 and the third printing unit 933.
  • the reversing unit 950 includes a reversing unit air ejection device 180.
  • the printer main body 900 is provided with a cover 901 so that each cylinder is not exposed to the operator.
  • the reversing part air ejecting device 180 is arranged on a so-called back side opposite to the side where the cover 901 is provided, in a position facing each cylinder.
  • the reversing part air ejecting device 180 includes, for example, a reversing part first air ejecting apparatus 181, a reversing part second air ejecting apparatus 182, a reversing part third air ejecting apparatus 183, and a reversing part fourth air. And a jetting device 184. Note that the number of air ejection devices provided in the reversing unit air ejection device 180 is not limited to four.
  • each air ejecting apparatus from the reversing part first air ejecting apparatus 181 to the reversing part fourth air ejecting apparatus 184 is provided to face the side peripheral part of each trunk of the reversing part 950. Then, air is ejected toward the side periphery of each cylinder of the reversing unit 950. As a result, the reversing part air ejection device 180 presses the paper S that is wound around and conveyed on the side peripheral part of each cylinder of the reversing part 950 against the side peripheral part of each cylinder of the reversing part 950. In this way, the reversing part air ejection device 180 suppresses the flapping of the paper S.
  • the paper S whose recording surface is reversed by the reversing unit 950 is printed by the third printing unit 933 and the fourth printing unit 934 and is discharged to the paper discharge unit 960.
  • the printer main body 900 performs printing on both sides of the paper S.
  • the paper discharge unit 960 includes a paper discharge table 961, a chain 962, a paper discharge drum 963, a driven shaft 964, a gripper 965, a chamber guide 966, and a paper discharge unit air ejection device 190.
  • the paper discharge table 961 is a table on which the paper S printed by the printing unit 930 is stacked.
  • the chain 962 is wound around a paper discharge drum 963 arranged on the printing unit 930 side and a driven shaft 964 arranged on the paper discharge table 961 side.
  • the paper discharge cylinder 963 and the driven shaft 964 rotate with an axis parallel to the rotation axis of each cylinder of the cylinder group 940 as a rotation axis.
  • the gripper 965 is attached to the chain 962.
  • the gripper 965 grips a part of the paper S. With the gripper 965 grasping a part of the paper S, the paper discharge drum 963 and the driven shaft 964 rotate so that the chain 962 conveys the paper S toward the paper discharge table 961.
  • the chamber guide 966 is provided to face the chain 962.
  • the chamber guide 966 is provided along a conveyance line in which the gripper 965 grips a part of the paper S and heads toward the paper discharge table 961.
  • the chamber guide 966 guides the paper S that is gripped and conveyed by the gripper 965.
  • the paper ejection unit air ejection device 190 includes, for example, a paper ejection unit first air ejection device 191 and a paper ejection unit second air ejection device 192.
  • the first air ejection device 191 for the paper discharge unit is provided in the chamber guide 966.
  • the first air ejection device 191 for the paper discharge unit ejects air toward the paper S in a direction away from the chamber guide 966.
  • the first air ejection device 191 for the paper discharge unit secures a gap between the paper S that is gripped and conveyed by the gripper 965 and the chamber guide 966. In this way, the first air ejection device 191 for the paper discharge unit suppresses the possibility that the paper S printed by the printing unit 930 comes into contact with the chamber guide 966 and is rubbed.
  • the second air ejection device 192 for the paper discharge unit is provided to face the paper discharge table 961. Specifically, the second air ejection device 192 for the paper discharge unit is provided on the opposite side of the paper discharge unit 960 with the paper S being gripped and conveyed by the gripper 965 as a boundary. The second air ejection device 192 for the paper ejection unit ejects air toward the paper ejection table 961.
  • the second air ejection device 192 for the paper discharge unit applies the wind toward the paper discharge table 961 to the paper S that is gripped and conveyed by the gripper 965. In this way, the paper S that is gripped and conveyed by the gripper 965 is guided to the paper discharge table 961.
  • the printing press control apparatus 200 includes a computer and controls each part of the printing press main body 900.
  • the printing press control apparatus 200 is electrically connected to, for example, a paper feed unit 910, a printing unit 930, a reversing unit 950, and a paper discharge unit 960.
  • the printing press control apparatus 200 controls each part of the printing press main body 900.
  • the printing press control device 200 is electrically connected to the lifting device 923a of the paper feeding device 920 shown in FIG. Accordingly, the printing press control apparatus 200 adjusts the size of the gap between the paper pressing member 923 and the guide plate 921 shown in FIG. Further, the printing press control apparatus 200 is electrically connected to the paper feeding apparatus air ejection apparatus 170. Thereby, the printing press control apparatus 200 adjusts the flow rate of the air ejected by the paper ejecting apparatus air ejecting apparatus 170.
  • the printing press control apparatus 200 is electrically connected to the reversing part air ejecting apparatus 180 shown in FIG. Thereby, the printing press control apparatus 200 adjusts the flow rate of the air ejected by each air ejecting apparatus of the reversing unit air ejecting apparatus 180. Further, the printing press control apparatus 200 is electrically connected to the paper discharge unit air ejection apparatus 190. Accordingly, the printing press control apparatus 200 adjusts the flow rate of the air ejected by each air ejection device of the paper ejection unit air ejection device 190.
  • the printing press control device 200 is configured to include a setting input auxiliary device 100.
  • the setting input auxiliary device 100 is configured to be incorporated in the printing press control device 200 as a part of the printing press control device 200. That is, the configuration included in the setting input auxiliary device 100 is also a configuration included in the printing press control device 200, and the procedure executed by the setting input auxiliary device 100 is also the procedure executed by the printing press control device 200.
  • the setting input auxiliary device 100 may be configured to be provided separately from the printing press control device 200 without being incorporated in the printing press control device 200.
  • the setting input auxiliary device 100 is configured by connecting an input unit 110, a display unit 120, and an imaging unit 150.
  • the input unit 110 is a part operated by an operator of the printing press 1.
  • the input unit 110 is, for example, a keyboard or a mouse.
  • the display unit 120 is a touch panel monitor, the input unit 110 is included in the display unit 120.
  • the display unit 120 is a part that displays information necessary for an operator to operate the input unit 110 to control the printing press main body 900.
  • the display unit 120 is, for example, a CRT (Cathode-Ray Tube) monitor or a liquid crystal monitor.
  • the imaging unit 150 includes, for example, a first camera 151, a second camera 152, a third camera 153, and a fourth camera 154.
  • a first camera 151 for example, a first camera 151, a second camera 152, a third camera 153, and a fourth camera 154.
  • a fourth camera 154 for example, a fourth camera 154.
  • an example of the configuration of the imaging unit 150 will be described.
  • the number of cameras included in the imaging unit 150 and the parts where the cameras are installed are not limited to the configuration described below.
  • the first camera 151 is attached to the paper feeding unit 910. Specifically, the first camera 151 is attached at a position facing the traveling surface of the guide plate 921 of the paper feeding device 920 shown in FIG. Thereby, the first camera 151 images the traveling surface of the guide plate 921. When the paper S travels on the traveling surface of the guide plate 921, the first camera 151 images the paper S traveling on the traveling surface of the guide plate 921.
  • the first camera 151 is attached so that not only the traveling surface of the guide plate 921 but also the gap between the paper pressing member 923 and the guide plate 921 can be imaged. Accordingly, the first camera 151 images the guide plate 921 and the paper pressing member 923 and the paper S passing through the gap.
  • the first camera 151 has a state in which the paper S is sucked to the guide plate 921 and travels on the guide plate 921 by the paper blower air jet device 170, and the paper S is moved to the paper holding member 923 and the guide plate. The state of passing through the gap with the 921 is imaged.
  • the second camera 152 shown in FIG. 1 is attached to a position facing the reversal intermediate cylinder 951, reversal magnification cylinder 952, and reversal cylinder 953 of the reversing unit 950.
  • the printer main body 900 is provided with a cover 901 so that each cylinder is not exposed to the operator. Thus, the operator needs to open the cover 901 when viewing each cylinder.
  • the second camera 152 is arranged on a so-called back side opposite to the side where the cover 901 is provided, in a position facing each barrel. That is, even if the operator opens the cover 901, the second camera 152 is attached to a site that is difficult for the operator to see.
  • the second camera 152 images a portion of the reversing unit 950 where the air ejected by the reversing unit air ejection device 180 is guided. Therefore, the second camera 152 captures an image of the paper S being prevented from flapping.
  • the third camera 153 and the fourth camera 154 are attached to the paper discharge unit 960.
  • the third camera 153 is attached at a position facing the chamber guide 966.
  • the third camera 153 images the state in which the first paper ejection device 191 for paper discharge unit ejects air and is guided by the paper S that is gripped and conveyed by the gripper 965.
  • the fourth camera 154 is attached so as to face the paper discharge table 961. As a result, the fourth camera 154 images the state in which the second air ejection device 192 for the paper ejection unit ejects air toward the paper ejection table 961 and the paper S is guided toward the paper ejection table 961. .
  • each camera of the imaging unit 150 is arranged in a portion surrounded by the cover 901 and the casing of the printing press main body 900, that is, the so-called printing press main body 900. Since the paper powder of the paper S may be scattered inside the printer main body 900, there is a possibility that the lenses of each camera of the imaging unit 150 may become dirty.
  • the imaging unit 150 is configured so that each camera can be easily removed from the inside of the printing press main body 900 and cleaned.
  • the imaging unit 150 is configured so that a window or a door that can be opened and closed is formed in a casing near each camera, and the operator can easily clean the lens by putting a hand through the window or door. Thereby, even if paper dust adheres to the lens of each camera of the imaging unit 150, the operator can easily clean the lens of each camera.
  • the imaging unit 150 is configured so that the mounting angle of each camera can be arbitrarily changed.
  • the imaging unit 150 is provided with a hinge portion for angle adjustment at a mounting portion of each camera. Thereby, the operator can finely adjust the imaging target of each camera of the imaging unit 150.
  • Each camera of the imaging unit 150 is electrically connected to the setting input auxiliary device 100.
  • the setting input auxiliary device 100 acquires an image to be captured from each camera of the imaging unit 150 and displays the acquired video on the display unit 120.
  • the setting input auxiliary device 100 includes the video of the paper feeding unit 910 acquired from the first camera 151, the video of the reversing unit 950 acquired from the second camera 152, the third camera 153, and the fourth camera 154.
  • the display unit 120 displays the image of the paper discharge unit 960 acquired from the above.
  • FIG. 3 is a configuration diagram schematically showing the display unit when the reference screen is displayed.
  • the screen shown in FIG. 3 is an example of a screen displayed when the operator starts an operation from now on.
  • the setting input auxiliary device 100 includes, for example, a first video display unit 131, a second video display unit 132, a third video display unit 133, and a fourth video display unit on the display unit 120. 134 and buttons 140 are displayed.
  • the setting input auxiliary device 100 displays, for example, the image of the paper feeding unit 910 captured by the first camera 151 illustrated in FIG. 1 on the first video display unit 131. Further, the setting input auxiliary device 100 displays, for example, the video of the reversing unit 950 captured by the second camera 152 illustrated in FIG. 1 on the second video display unit 132.
  • the setting input auxiliary device 100 displays, on the third video display unit 133, for example, an image of the paper discharge unit 960 captured by the third camera 153 illustrated in FIG. 1, and the first air ejection device 191 for the paper discharge unit. The image of the paper S guided by is displayed.
  • the setting input auxiliary device 100 displays, on the fourth video display unit 134, for example, a video of the paper discharge unit 960 captured by the fourth camera 154 shown in FIG. 1, and the second air ejection device 192 for the paper discharge unit. The image of the paper S guided to the paper discharge tray 961 is displayed.
  • buttons 140 are not mechanical push buttons in which two contacts are brought into contact with each other when a movable part is pressed by an operator to generate a predetermined signal, but electronic buttons displayed on the display unit 120. This is a virtual operation unit.
  • buttons 140 are actually images for assisting the operation, and instead of generating a predetermined signal, the operator operates the input unit 110 to operate the buttons 140. If 100 detects, it will be judged that the setting input auxiliary device 100 acquired the predetermined signal.
  • the buttons 140 include, for example, a setting button 141, a print start button 142, a print stop button 143, a recording start button 144, a recording stop button 145, and a playback button 146.
  • the print start button 142 When the print start button 142 is operated, the setting input auxiliary device 100 acquires a print start signal, and starts printing on the paper S by the printer main body 900.
  • the setting input auxiliary device 100 acquires a print stop signal and stops printing on the paper S by the printing machine body 900.
  • the recording start button 144, the recording stop button 145, and the playback button 146 will be described later.
  • the setting input auxiliary device 100 does not necessarily display the four screens from the first video display unit 131 to the fourth video display unit 134 on the reference screen.
  • the setting input auxiliary device 100 may display at least the setting button 141 on the reference screen.
  • the setting button 141 is an image displayed in a setting start operation auxiliary area arranged on the display unit 120, and is an image for assisting an operation for starting setting of a setting target.
  • the setting input auxiliary device 100 displays the setting start operation auxiliary area on the display unit 120 and displays the image of the setting button 141 in the setting start operation auxiliary area.
  • FIG. 4 is a configuration diagram schematically showing the display unit when the setting item list is displayed.
  • the setting input auxiliary device 100 displays a list of items to be set by the operator on the display unit 120, as shown in FIG.
  • the setting input auxiliary device 100 includes, for example, a lifting / lowering device setting button 141a, a paper feeding device air ejecting device setting button 141b, a reversing unit air ejecting device setting button 141c, and a first discharging unit.
  • An air ejection device setting button 141d and a second air ejection device setting button 141e for the paper discharge unit are displayed.
  • the setting input assisting device 100 acquires an elevating device setting operation start signal as a specific setting operation start signal.
  • the lifting device setting operation start signal is acquired, the setting input auxiliary device 100 switches from the current screen to a screen for adjusting the size of the gap between the paper pressing member 923 and the guide plate 921.
  • the setting input auxiliary device 100 acquires a paper feeding device air ejection device setting operation start signal as a specific setting operation start signal.
  • the setting input auxiliary device 100 switches from the current screen to a screen for adjusting the flow rate of the air ejected by the paper feeding device air ejection device 170.
  • the setting input auxiliary device 100 acquires the reversing part air ejection device setting operation start signal as the specific setting operation start signal.
  • the setting input auxiliary device 100 switches from the current screen to a screen for adjusting the flow rate of the air ejected by the inversion unit air ejection device 180.
  • the setting input auxiliary device 100 acquires a paper discharge unit first air ejection device setting operation start signal as a specific setting operation start signal.
  • the setting input auxiliary device 100 adjusts the flow rate of the air discharged from the first discharge unit 191 for discharge unit from the current screen. Switch to the screen.
  • the setting input assisting device 100 acquires a paper discharge unit second air ejection device setting operation start signal as a specific setting operation start signal.
  • the setting input auxiliary device 100 adjusts the flow rate of the air discharged from the second discharge unit 192 for discharge unit from the current screen. Switch to the screen.
  • a lifting device setting operation start signal a paper feeding device air jetting device setting operation start signal, a reversing unit air jetting device setting operation start signal, a paper discharge unit first air jetting device setting operation start signal,
  • the sheet discharge unit second air ejection device setting operation start signal is collectively referred to as a setting operation start signal.
  • FIG. 5 is a configuration diagram schematically showing a display unit when the setting screen of the first embodiment is displayed.
  • the setting input auxiliary device 100 displays a recording time display unit 138, a setting operation auxiliary area 147, and a preset selection unit 148 on the display unit 120 as shown in FIG.
  • the setting input auxiliary device 100 displays on the setting target video display unit 136 a setting target video that is a target to be set by the operator.
  • the setting input auxiliary device 100 inputs an image of an input unit for inputting a setting value, which is a numerical value for controlling a setting target, a button for changing the setting value, and the numerical value in the setting operation auxiliary area 147. For example, a slider image is displayed instead of the input unit.
  • the setting operation assistance area 147 is an area in which an image for assisting input of a setting value for controlling a setting target is displayed. The operator looks at the image displayed in the setting operation auxiliary area 147 and operates the input unit 110. Thus, the operator inputs a set value.
  • the target that the operator actually operates is the input unit 110, but the setting input assisting device 100 assists the input of the setting value by making the operator think that the setting operation assisting area 147 is operated. . Therefore, in the following description, even if the operator actually operates the input unit 110 and inputs a set value, the description assumes that the operator operates the setting operation auxiliary area 147 and inputs the set value.
  • the operator operates the setting operation auxiliary area 147 to set the setting target.
  • the operation of the slider by the operator is treated as the same as the input of the setting value by the operator.
  • the setting input auxiliary device 100 displays, on the preset selection unit 148, examples of numerical values that are preset setting values and control the setting target.
  • preset numerical values are referred to as preset values.
  • the operator can complete the setting of the setting target without operating the setting operation auxiliary area 147 by operating the preset selection unit 148 and selecting the exemplified preset value.
  • the setting input auxiliary device 100 stores the numerical value input by the operator by operating the setting operation auxiliary area 147 in the storage device. From the next time, the numerical value stored in the storage unit is displayed as a preset value on the preset selection unit 148. By selecting the preset value, the operator can complete the setting target setting with the same setting as the previous time without operating the setting operation auxiliary area 147.
  • a set value of a device constituted by a plurality of devices is a combination of a plurality of set values.
  • the setting input auxiliary device 100 displays the combination of the plurality of setting values on the display unit 120 as a preset value.
  • the operator can easily complete setting of the setting target without individually operating the plurality of sliders displayed in the setting operation auxiliary area 147.
  • setting input auxiliary device 100 can reduce an operator's work amount.
  • the setting input auxiliary device 100 displays the image of the paper feeding unit 910 on the setting target video display unit 136, specifically, the paper pressing member 923. And an image of the gap between the guide plate 921 and the guide plate 921.
  • the setting input auxiliary device 100 displays a slider for adjusting the size of the gap between the paper pressing member 923 and the guide plate 921 by moving the lifting device 923a in the setting operation auxiliary area 147.
  • the setting input auxiliary device 100 When the setting input auxiliary device 100 acquires the paper feeding device air ejection device setting operation start signal, the setting input auxiliary device 100 displays the image of the paper feeding unit 910 on the setting target video display unit 136, specifically, a guide plate. An image of the paper S traveling on the traveling surface 921 is displayed. In addition, the setting input assist device 100 displays a slider for adjusting the flow rate of the air ejected from the paper ejecting device air ejecting device 170 in the setting operation assisting region 147.
  • the setting input auxiliary device 100 When the setting input auxiliary device 100 acquires the reversing unit air ejection device setting operation start signal, the setting input auxiliary device 100 displays the video of the reversing unit 950 on the setting target video display unit 136, specifically, the reversing unit 950. The image of the portion where the air ejected by the reversing portion air ejection device 180 is guided is displayed. In addition, the setting input assist device 100 displays a slider for adjusting the flow rate of the air ejected from the reversing part air ejecting device 180 in the setting operation assisting region 147.
  • the reversing unit air ejection device 180 is configured to include four air ejection devices. Therefore, the setting input assisting device 100 ejects the setting operation assisting region 147 from the slider for adjusting the flow rate of the air ejected from the first reversing unit air ejection device 181 and the second reversing unit air ejecting device 182.
  • a slider for adjusting is configured to include four air ejection devices. Therefore, the setting input assisting device 100 ejects the setting operation assisting region 147 from the slider for adjusting the flow rate of the air ejected from the first reversing unit air ejection device 181 and the second reversing unit air ejecting device
  • the setting input auxiliary device 100 When the setting input auxiliary device 100 acquires the first discharge unit setting operation start signal for the paper discharge unit, the setting input auxiliary device 100 captures the setting target video display unit 136 of the paper discharge unit 960 captured by the third camera 153. An image, specifically, an image of the paper S traveling along the chamber guide 966 is displayed. In addition, the setting input assist device 100 displays a slider for adjusting the flow rate of the air ejected from the first paper ejection device 191 for the paper discharge unit in the setting operation assist area 147.
  • the setting input auxiliary device 100 When the setting input auxiliary device 100 acquires the second discharge unit setting operation start signal for the paper discharge unit, the setting input auxiliary device 100 captures the setting target video display unit 136 of the paper discharge unit 960 captured by the fourth camera 154. An image, specifically, an image of the paper S guided to the paper discharge tray 961 is displayed. In addition, the setting input assist device 100 displays a slider for adjusting the flow rate of the air ejected from the second air ejecting device 192 for the paper discharge unit in the setting operation assisting area 147.
  • the setting input auxiliary device 100 displays the setting operation auxiliary area for controlling the setting object together with the setting object video corresponding to the acquired setting operation start signal on the display unit 120.
  • the operator can set the setting target by operating the setting operation auxiliary area 147 or the preset selection unit 148 while confirming the setting target displayed in real time on the setting target video display unit 136. it can.
  • the setting input auxiliary device 100 can reduce the amount of work for the operator.
  • the setting input auxiliary device 100 automatically displays the setting target video on the display unit 120. Therefore, if the setting input auxiliary device 100 is used, the operator does not need to manually switch the video. Thereby, setting input auxiliary device 100 can reduce an operator's workload more suitably.
  • the video displayed on the display unit 120 is not limited to a smooth moving image, and may be a so-called dropped frame moving image in which still images are continuously displayed.
  • the video displayed on the display unit 120 has a quality that allows the operator to check whether the set value is appropriate by operating the setting operation auxiliary area 147 and viewing the setting target video display unit 136. It only has to be done.
  • the setting input auxiliary device 100 is described as being connected to one display unit 120. However, the setting input auxiliary device 100 is connected to a plurality of display units 120 so that a multi-monitor system is connected. May be configured.
  • the setting input auxiliary device 100 displays the setting target video corresponding to the acquired setting operation start signal on the first display unit. And a setting operation auxiliary area for controlling the setting object is displayed on the second display unit.
  • the setting input auxiliary device 100 can reduce the amount of work for the operator.
  • the setting input auxiliary device 100 may control, for example, a rotary printing machine that performs printing on a web as a recording medium in addition to the sheet-fed printing machine.
  • the camera is attached to, for example, a paper feeding unit.
  • the setting input auxiliary device 100 displays an image of a paper feeding unit, specifically, for example, an image of a paster unit on the display unit 120 and a setting operation auxiliary area for controlling the paster unit on the display unit 120. indicate.
  • the setting input auxiliary device 100 controls a rotary printing press that performs printing on the web, for example, the camera is attached to the inside of the folding machine.
  • the setting input auxiliary device 100 displays an image inside the folding machine on the display unit 120 and displays a setting operation auxiliary area for fine adjustment of the folding position and the chopper position on the display unit 120.
  • the setting input auxiliary device 100 does not require the operator to set the setting target while viewing the setting target away from the control device. In addition, the setting input auxiliary device 100 does not require the operator to manually switch the video. Therefore, the setting input auxiliary device 100 can reduce the amount of work for the operator even when controlling a rotary printing press that performs printing on the web.
  • the setting input auxiliary device 100 displays, for example, an entire display unit 135 on the display unit 120.
  • the setting input auxiliary device 100 displays an overall view schematically showing the printing machine main body 900 on the overall display unit 135, and the imaging target currently displayed on the display unit 120 corresponds to the overall view. For example, it is indicated by a circle.
  • the setting input auxiliary device 100 displays the paper discharge on the entire display unit 135.
  • a general view of the printer main body 900 is displayed in which circles are added to all of the two portions of the portion 960, the paper feeding portion 910, and the reversing portion 950.
  • FIG. 6 is a block diagram schematically showing the control device.
  • the setting input auxiliary device 100 includes a camera server 160, for example.
  • the camera server 160 is electrically connected to each camera of the imaging unit 150. As a result, the camera server 160 acquires the video of each part of the printing press main body 900 from the imaging unit 150.
  • the camera server 160 includes a storage device 161 as storage means, a removable storage device connection device 162, and a communication line connection device 163.
  • the storage device 161 is, for example, a hard disk.
  • the storage device 161 stores the video captured by the imaging unit 150 as a recorded video.
  • the display unit 120 displays a recording start button 144, a recording stop button 145, a playback button 146, and a recording time display unit 138.
  • the camera server 160 records the video of the printing machine main body 900 until the recording stop button 145 is operated in the storage device 161.
  • the video to be recorded may be all four videos displayed on the fourth video display unit 134 from the first video display unit 131, or only the video selected by the operator from the four videos.
  • the setting input auxiliary device 100 may be configured to automatically record the video to be displayed on the setting target video display unit 136 shown in FIG. 5 after acquiring the setting operation start signal and store the video in the storage device 161. .
  • the setting input auxiliary device 100 While the video of each part of the printing press main body 900 is being recorded, the setting input auxiliary device 100 displays the recording time on the recording time display unit 138. When the recording stop button 145 is operated, the setting input auxiliary device 100 ends the recording and stores the recorded video in the storage device 161.
  • the setting input auxiliary device 100 displays a list of recorded videos stored in the storage device 161 on the display unit 120, for example.
  • the setting input auxiliary device 100 displays the desired recorded video on the display unit 120.
  • the detachable storage device connection device 162 is a device for connecting a storage medium, which is a storage means that can be attached to and detached from the camera server 160, to the camera server 160.
  • the storage medium is, for example, a silicon disk.
  • the same video as the recorded video stored in the storage device 161 is stored in the silicon disk.
  • the setting input auxiliary device 100 may be configured to save a part of the recorded video stored in the storage device 161 on a silicon disk.
  • the setting input auxiliary device 100 can store the recorded video of each part of the printer main body 900 on the silicon disk connected to the removable storage device connection device 162.
  • a maintenance worker who performs maintenance of the printing press main body 900 can easily check the recorded video of each part of the printing press main body 900 when the malfunction occurs in the printing press main body 900 by taking the silicon disk home. . Therefore, the setting input auxiliary device 100 can reduce the labor of a maintenance worker who maintains the printing machine main body 900.
  • the communication line connection device 163 connects the camera server 160 to the communication line, and provides the video acquired from the imaging unit 150 to a display device other than the setting input auxiliary device 100 via the communication line, for example, the personal computer 800. It is a device for doing.
  • the camera server 160 can provide the image of the printer main body 900 to an external display device via a communication line, for example, a personal computer 800 provided at a remote location can also print via the communication line.
  • the image of the main body 900 can be acquired.
  • the communication line is, for example, the Internet.
  • the administrator of the printing press main body 900 can check the operation state of the printing press main body 900 without going to the site where the printing press 1 is installed. Therefore, the setting input auxiliary device 100 can reduce the labor of the administrator of the printing press main body 900.
  • the setting input auxiliary device of the second embodiment has a new function in addition to the functions of the setting input auxiliary device 100 of the first embodiment.
  • the printing press control apparatus and the printing press that include the setting input auxiliary device of the second embodiment similarly to the new functions in addition to the functions of the printing press control apparatus 200 and the printing press 1 of the first embodiment. It has a function.
  • new functions of the setting input auxiliary device, the printing press control device, and the printing press according to the second embodiment will be described.
  • the configuration of the setting input auxiliary device of the second embodiment is the same as that of the setting input auxiliary device 100 of the first embodiment. Therefore, elements having the same functions as those of the setting input auxiliary device 100 of the first embodiment are denoted by the same reference numerals.
  • FIG. 7 is a configuration diagram schematically showing the display unit when the tracking screen is displayed.
  • the setting input auxiliary device displays a tracking screen on the display unit 120.
  • the tracking screen includes an entire display unit 135, a first video display unit 131 to a fourth video display unit 134, a remark display unit 31, and a paper designation unit 32.
  • Each video display unit from the first video display unit 131 to the fourth video display unit 134 of the present embodiment displays a still image as a video.
  • each said video display part may display a moving image as an image
  • the setting input auxiliary device displays the first video display unit 131 to the fourth video display unit 134 in a line on the display unit 120 one by one.
  • the setting input auxiliary device causes the display unit 120 to display a plurality of rows of the fourth video display unit 134 from the arranged first video display unit 131.
  • the setting input auxiliary device may display only one line of the arranged first video display unit 131 to fourth video display unit 134 on the display unit 120.
  • Remarks display unit 31 is a part that displays the printing conditions set when each of the first camera 151 to the fourth camera 154 shown in FIG.
  • the printing conditions include, for example, the printing speed at which the paper S travels the printing machine main body 900, the size of the paper S (planar dimensions), the thickness of the paper S, the type of the paper S, and the printing machine main body 900. Is the number of colors used when printing on the paper S.
  • the remark display part 31 contains a memo column, for example. This memo field is a part where the operator can write arbitrary information.
  • the paper designating unit 32 is a part for designating a specific paper S from among a plurality of papers S flowing from the paper supply unit 910 toward the paper discharge unit 960.
  • the paper designation unit 32 is displayed on the display unit 120 for each row formed by the first video display unit 131 to the fourth video display unit 134. That is, in the present embodiment, the three paper designation units 32 are displayed on the display unit 120.
  • the paper designating unit 32 can designate a specific paper S from a plurality of papers S as a range, for example, “first sheet to 20th sheet”.
  • the paper designating unit 32 may be one that can designate one specific paper S from a plurality of papers S instead of a range.
  • the operator inputs a numerical value designating a specific paper S into the paper designating unit 32.
  • the storage device 161 shown in FIG. 6 stores the specific information and the printing speed at that time (when each camera images the setting target) together with the video imaged by each camera.
  • the specific information is information for extracting a part in which the specific paper S is imaged from the entire range of the video in which a plurality of papers S are captured.
  • the storage device 161 stores, as specific information, the time that has elapsed since the paper S started to be fed from the paper supply unit 910 toward the paper discharge unit 960.
  • the time elapsed after the paper S starts to be fed from the paper supply unit 910 toward the paper discharge unit 960 is referred to as elapsed time.
  • the setting input auxiliary device Based on the elapsed time and the printing speed, the setting input auxiliary device identifies the paper S imaged by the camera at a certain time from among the plurality of papers S.
  • the first video display unit 131 in the column displays the fourth video.
  • the image of each setting target is displayed on the unit 134.
  • the video displayed on the fourth video display unit 134 from the first video display unit 131 is a video obtained by capturing the specific paper S input to the paper designating unit 32.
  • the setting input auxiliary device first acquires the specific information and the printing speed at that time from the storage device 161.
  • the setting input auxiliary device converts the value input to the paper specifying unit 32 (a value specifying a specific range from the plurality of papers S) into an elapsed time for each setting target.
  • the setting input auxiliary device specifies a portion corresponding to the converted elapsed time from the entire range of the video acquired from the storage device 161.
  • the setting input auxiliary device displays the video of the portion from the first video display unit 131 to the fourth video display unit 134.
  • the setting input auxiliary device causes the first video display unit 131 to display an image when the specific paper S reaches the paper feeding device 920 of the paper feeding unit 910 shown in FIG.
  • the setting input auxiliary device causes the second video display unit 132 to display a video when the specific paper S reaches the reversing unit 950.
  • the setting input assist device causes the third video display unit 133 to display an image when the specific paper S reaches the chain 962 of the paper discharge unit 960.
  • the setting input auxiliary device causes the fourth video display unit 134 to display a video when the specific paper S reaches the paper discharge tray 961 of the paper discharge unit 960.
  • the setting input auxiliary device can display the image in which the paper S is captured from the first video display unit 131 on the fourth video display unit 134 so as to follow the trajectory of the specific paper S.
  • the operator can check the state of printing on the paper S by the printer main body 900 retrospectively. For example, it is assumed that a problem has occurred in the paper S discharged to the paper discharge unit 960 immediately after the start of the print job.
  • the operator inputs, for example, the first to twentieth sheets in the paper designating unit 32.
  • the printing press 1 displays a video image of the first to twentieth paper sheets S from the first video display unit 131 to the fourth video display unit 134.
  • the operator can confirm the state of the paper S immediately after the start of the print job by confirming this video. Therefore, the setting input auxiliary device can provide the operator with the details of the state of the paper S when the paper S travels through each part of the printer main body 900.
  • FIG. 8 is a configuration diagram schematically showing the display unit when the enlarged display tracking screen is displayed.
  • the setting input auxiliary device displays an enlarged display tracking screen as shown in FIG. It is displayed on the display unit 120.
  • This enlarged display tracking screen includes an entire display unit 135, a first video display unit 131 to a fourth video display unit 134, a remarks display unit 31, and an enlarged video display unit 33. Note that the remark display unit 31 may not be displayed on the display unit 120.
  • the first video display unit 131 to the fourth video display unit 134 are displayed on the display unit 120 in a line, for example.
  • the enlarged video display unit 33 is a part that enlarges and displays one of the videos displayed on the fourth video display unit 134 from the first video display unit 131.
  • the setting input auxiliary device displays the video displayed on the second video display unit 132 more than the second video display unit 132.
  • the image is enlarged and displayed on the enlarged image display unit 33. That is, on the enlarged display tracking screen, each video display unit from the first video display unit 131 to the fourth video display unit 134 functions as a so-called thumbnail.
  • the setting input auxiliary device can enlarge a video desired by the operator from the first video display unit 131 to the fourth video display unit 134 and display the video on the display unit 120. Therefore, the setting input auxiliary device can provide the operator with an image that the operator desires more easily.
  • the setting input auxiliary device of this embodiment may not display all of the first video display unit 131 to the fourth video display unit 134 shown in FIGS. 7 and 8 on the display unit 120 at the same time.
  • the setting input auxiliary device causes the display unit 120 to display at least one of the first video display unit 131 to the fourth video display unit 134.
  • the setting input auxiliary device displays the video image of the specific paper S designated by the paper designating unit 32 and the video image displayed on the display unit 120 among the first video display unit 131 to the fourth video display unit 134. Display on the display.
  • the setting input auxiliary device can provide the operator with a more detailed view of the state of the paper S when the paper S travels through each part of the printer main body 900.
  • FIG. 9 is a configuration diagram schematically showing a display unit when the setting screen of the second embodiment is displayed.
  • the setting input auxiliary device displays the setting screen illustrated in FIG. 9 on the display unit 120.
  • the setting screen includes a setting operation auxiliary area 147, a setting target video display unit 34, a preset selection unit 40, a registration button 41, a read button 42, a candidate display button 43, a whole display button 44, a paper size limiter.
  • a narrow button 45, a color number narrow button 46, a paper type narrow button 47, a paper thickness narrow button 48, a print speed narrow button 49, and a comparison button 50 are included.
  • the setting screen also includes an entire display unit 135, a print start button 142, a print stop button 143, a recording start button 144, a recording stop button 145, and a recording time display unit 138.
  • the setting target video display unit 34 displays video captured by each camera (in FIG. 9, the second camera 152 shown in FIG. 1) when a print job is executed with the setting value selected by the preset selection unit 40.
  • the setting target video display unit 136 shown in FIG. 5 is a part that displays the current video to be set
  • the setting target video display unit 34 shown in FIG. 9 is a part that displays the past video to be set.
  • the preset selection unit 40 is a part that displays a list including a plurality of setting values.
  • the preset selection unit 148 shown in FIG. 5 displays specific values of each setting value as a list, whereas the preset selection unit 40 shown in FIG. 9 finds a part of printing conditions when each setting value is registered. Is different in that a list of setting values is displayed.
  • the registration button 41 is a button for storing the setting value input in the setting operation auxiliary area 147 in the storage device 161.
  • the storage device 161 stores the setting value input in the setting operation auxiliary area 147 in association with the current printing condition (for the current print job).
  • the setting input auxiliary device a part of the printing conditions is input at the time of setting the print job before displaying the setting screen. Some of the printing conditions are, for example, paper size, paper thickness, and number of colors. Therefore, when the registration button 41 is operated, the setting input auxiliary device instructs the operator to newly input other printing conditions, specifically, the printing speed and the paper type. In response to this instruction, the operator inputs the printing speed and paper type. Then, the setting input auxiliary device stores these printing conditions in the storage device 161 in association with the setting values input in the setting operation auxiliary area 147.
  • the read button 42 is a button for causing the preset selection unit 40 to display the set value stored in the storage device 161.
  • the candidate display button 43 is a button for searching for a setting value that can be a candidate from all the setting values stored in the storage device 161 and causing the preset selection unit 40 to display a list of setting values corresponding to the search. It is.
  • the setting input auxiliary device based on the printing conditions currently input (in the current print job), a list of setting values associated with printing conditions close to the printing conditions. Is displayed on the preset selection unit 40.
  • the whole display button 44 is a button for causing the preset selection unit 40 to display a list of all setting values stored in the storage device 161.
  • Each button from the paper size narrowing down button 45 to the printing speed narrowing down button 49 is a button for narrowing down the plurality of setting values according to printing conditions desired by the operator.
  • the setting input auxiliary device matches the value entered in the current print job or the paper size entered in the current print job. Is displayed on the preset selection unit 40.
  • the setting input auxiliary device rearranges the list of setting values in the order in which the paper size is closer to the current (current print job) paper size.
  • the paper size narrowing button 45 also functions as a part for displaying the printing speed under the current printing conditions.
  • the setting input auxiliary device matches the value entered in the current print job or the value entered in the current print job. Is displayed on the preset selection unit 40. Alternatively, the setting input auxiliary device rearranges the list of setting values in the order in which the number of colors is closer to the current number of colors (current print job).
  • the setting input auxiliary device matches the value that the paper type is input in the current print job or the value that the paper type is input in the current print job. Is displayed on the preset selection unit 40. Alternatively, the setting input auxiliary device rearranges the list of setting values in the order in which the paper type is closest to the current (current print job) paper type.
  • the setting input auxiliary device matches the value that the paper thickness is input in the current print job or the value that the paper thickness is input in the current print job. Is displayed on the preset selection unit 40. Alternatively, the setting input auxiliary device rearranges the list of setting values in the order in which the paper thickness is close to the current paper thickness (current print job).
  • the print speed narrowing button 49 the setting input auxiliary device determines that the print speed matches the value input in the current print job or the print speed is input in the current print job. Is displayed on the preset selection unit 40. Alternatively, the setting input auxiliary device sorts the list of setting values in the order in which the printing speed is close to the current printing speed (current print job).
  • the “similarity” described above refers to a case where a difference between a value input in the current print job and a set value stored in the storage device 161 is within a predetermined value.
  • the setting input auxiliary device displays a list of setting values registered with a paper size of 969 mm ⁇ 636 mm on the preset selection unit 40.
  • the operator looks at the heading of each setting value displayed on the preset selection unit 40 and searches for a setting value that is the same as or similar to the current printing condition.
  • the headings of the setting values are the paper type and the printing speed.
  • the setting input auxiliary device may be able to change the heading to a printing condition other than the paper type and the printing speed.
  • the setting input auxiliary device causes the display unit 120 to display a button for selecting a heading. The operator operates this button to change the heading of the setting value displayed on the preset selection unit 40.
  • FIG. 10 is a configuration diagram schematically showing the display unit when the remarks display unit is displayed on the setting screen of the second embodiment.
  • the operator looks at a list of setting values displayed on the preset selection unit 40 shown in FIG. 9 and selects one setting value from a plurality of setting values.
  • the setting input auxiliary device reflects the selected setting value in the setting operation auxiliary area 147, for example.
  • the setting input auxiliary device causes the remark display unit 31 to be displayed on the display unit 120, and the video captured by the print job in which the setting value is registered is displayed on the setting target video display unit 34. Display.
  • the setting input auxiliary device displays the video captured by the second camera 152 on the setting target video display unit 34.
  • the operator looks at the remark display unit 31 and the setting target video display unit 34 shown in FIG. 10 and determines whether or not the printing on the paper S with the set values is good. It is determined whether or not it can be suppressed satisfactorily.
  • the setting input auxiliary device displays detailed information of the setting value on the remark display unit 31 and sets the image captured when the print job is executed with the setting value as a setting target. It is displayed on the video display unit 34. Thereby, if a setting input auxiliary device is used, an operator can find a good set value more easily.
  • FIG. 11 is a configuration diagram schematically showing the display unit when the comparison setting screen is displayed.
  • the comparison setting screen includes a setting target video display unit 136, a setting target video display unit 34, and a setting operation auxiliary area 147.
  • the comparison setting screen also includes an entire display unit 135, a print start button 142, a print stop button 143, a recording start button 144, a recording stop button 145, and a recording time display unit 138.
  • the setting input auxiliary device causes the setting target video display unit 136 to display a video captured by each camera of the current setting target. Further, the setting input auxiliary device causes the setting target video display unit 34 to display a video obtained by each camera capturing the setting target when the print job is executed with the setting value selected in FIG.
  • the setting operation auxiliary area 147 shown in FIGS. 9 and 10 and the setting operation auxiliary area 147 shown in FIG. 11 have different shapes, but the functions to be realized are the same.
  • the operator operates the setting operation auxiliary area 147 while confirming the image when the print job is executed with the setting value selected by the preset selection unit 40 shown in FIG.
  • the video displayed by the setting target video display unit 136 changes according to the operation of the setting operation auxiliary area 147 by the operator.
  • the operator can make the video displayed on the setting target video display unit 136 better than the video displayed on the setting target video display unit 34 (video that can reduce the flutter of the paper S).
  • the setting operation auxiliary area 147 is operated. Thereby, if a setting input auxiliary device is used, an operator can find out a good setting value more easily.
  • the setting input auxiliary device 100 according to the first embodiment and the setting input auxiliary device according to the second embodiment display the video on the display unit 120 at a speed of 1 or less.
  • the setting input auxiliary device can display the moving image on the display unit 120 in a slow manner.
  • the setting input auxiliary device causes the display unit 120 to display the video at a speed less than 1.
  • the setting input auxiliary device can acquire a plurality of one setting target video by acquiring one setting target video from a plurality of cameras. Then, the setting input auxiliary device displays the plurality of videos on the display unit 120 at the same time, or switches the plurality of videos to the display unit 120 for display. As a result, the setting input auxiliary device can display a wider range of setting target images on the display unit 120. As a result, if the setting input auxiliary device is used, the operator can confirm the state of the setting target over a wider range.
  • the cameras of the first and second embodiments can capture images by enlarging or reducing the setting target. That is, the camera preferably has a zoom function.
  • the setting input auxiliary device can acquire an image showing a more detailed portion of the setting target from the camera by causing the camera to magnify and image the setting target. By displaying this video on the display unit 120, the setting input auxiliary device can provide the operator with a more detailed portion to be set as a video.
  • the setting input auxiliary device can acquire an image showing a wider range of the setting target from the camera by causing the camera to reduce the setting target and capture an image. By displaying this video on the display unit 120, the setting input auxiliary device can provide the operator with a wider range of the setting target as the video.
  • the camera can be rotated or moved with respect to the setting target. That is, it is preferable that the camera is provided in the printing press main body 900 via a swing mechanism or a slide mechanism.
  • the setting input auxiliary device controls the operation of the swing mechanism and the operation of the slide mechanism. Thereby, the setting input auxiliary device can acquire an image showing a wider range of the setting target from one camera. By displaying this video on the display unit 120, the setting input auxiliary device can provide the operator with a wider range of the setting target as the video.
  • a case will be described in which the camera is provided in the printing press main body 900 via a swing mechanism.
  • FIG. 12 is a configuration diagram schematically showing the display unit when the camera control screen is displayed.
  • the setting input auxiliary device displays a camera control screen as shown in FIG.
  • the camera control screen includes a video display unit 51, a camera switching button 52, a pan / tilt switching button 53, and a rotation button 54.
  • the video display unit 51 is a part that displays a video currently captured by each camera.
  • the camera switching button 52 is a button for selecting one camera from the first camera 151 to the fourth camera 154.
  • the setting input auxiliary device switches the control target of the swing mechanism to the camera selected by the camera switching button 52.
  • the setting input auxiliary device switches the video to be displayed on the video display unit 51 to the video captured by the camera selected by the camera switching button 52.
  • the pan / tilt switching button 53 and the rotation button 54 are buttons for rotating the camera selected by the camera switching button 52. More specifically, the pan / tilt switching button 53 is a button for switching the rotation direction of each camera.
  • the rotation button 54 is a button for adjusting the angle at which each camera is rotated. When the rotation button 54 is operated, the setting input auxiliary device is selected by the camera switching button 52 in the direction selected by the pan / tilt switching button 53 by the angle specified by the rotation button 54. Rotate the camera.
  • the setting input auxiliary device stores the imaging direction of each camera in the storage device 161 in advance.
  • the imaging direction is the angle of the camera with respect to the setting target.
  • the setting input auxiliary device displays the registration button 55 on the camera control screen, for example.
  • the setting input auxiliary device stores the imaging direction of the camera currently selected by the camera switching button 52 in the storage device 161.
  • the setting input auxiliary device acquires a plurality of imaging directions stored in the storage device 161 when the operator controls the camera swing mechanism.
  • the setting input auxiliary device controls the operation of the swing mechanism so that the current imaging direction of the camera matches the imaging direction acquired from the storage device 161.
  • the setting input auxiliary device can reduce an operator's work amount when controlling the operation of the camera swing mechanism.
  • the setting input auxiliary device can reduce the cost required for manufacturing the printing press 1 by providing a plurality of inexpensive fixed cameras for one setting target.
  • a camera having a swing mechanism or a slide mechanism can capture a wider range of setting objects than a fixed camera. Therefore, the setting input auxiliary device can reduce the number of cameras necessary for providing a wide range of setting objects to the operator as an image. As a result, the setting input auxiliary device may be able to simplify the structure of the printing press 1 and may reduce the size of the printing press 1.
  • a camera that is provided in a printer main body that performs printing on a recording medium and that captures a setting target that is a part of the printer main body; At least one display unit for displaying information necessary for controlling the setting target; Is a setting input auxiliary device to which The setting input auxiliary device is A setting start operation auxiliary area in which an image for assisting an operation of starting the setting target setting is displayed is displayed on the display unit; Based on the operation to start the setting target setting, The video to be set; A setting operation auxiliary area for displaying an image for assisting input of a setting value for controlling the setting object; Is displayed on the display unit.
  • the setting input auxiliary device is When an operation to start setting of the setting target is performed, a setting operation start signal is acquired, When obtaining the setting operation start signal, The video to be set; The setting operation auxiliary area; Is displayed on the display unit, The setting input assisting device according to additional item 1.
  • the camera is provided for each of the plurality of setting objects, When acquiring a specific setting operation start signal that is one of the setting operation start signals, a signal that is acquired when the setting of a specific setting target that is one of the plurality of setting objects is started from now on, The specific setting target video; As the setting operation auxiliary area, a specific setting operation auxiliary area for displaying an image for assisting input of a setting value for controlling the specific setting object; Is displayed on the display unit, The setting input auxiliary device according to item 2, wherein: (Appendix 4) When obtaining the setting operation start signal, 4.
  • the setting input auxiliary device according to claim 2 or 3, wherein a preset selection unit that is a part for selecting the setting value set in advance is displayed on the display unit.
  • Appendix 5 Comprising storage means for storing video captured by the camera; When a specific setting value is selected from the list of setting values displayed in the preset selection unit, the camera captures an image when the recording medium travels through the printer body with the selected setting value.
  • the setting input assisting device according to claim 4, wherein the obtained video is acquired from the storage unit and displayed on the display unit.
  • the storage unit stores specific information for extracting a portion where a specific recording medium is imaged from an image where a plurality of recording media are sequentially traveling.
  • the setting input assisting device wherein the setting input assisting device is specified for each camera, and an image of a portion of the specific recording medium captured is displayed on the display unit for each camera.
  • Appendix 9 When the video of the part where the specific recording medium is imaged is displayed on the display unit, the printing condition when the specific recording medium is imaged is displayed on the display unit.
  • a setting input auxiliary device according to item 7 or appendix 8.
  • Appendix 10 A supplementary note that causes the display unit to display an image currently captured by the camera together with an image captured by the camera when the recording medium travels through the printing press main body with the selected setting value. Item 10.
  • the setting input auxiliary device according to any one of Items 5 to 9, (Appendix 11) Rearranging a plurality of the setting values included in the list displayed in the preset selection unit based on printing conditions and displaying them on the display unit; Performing a refinement search with the printing conditions for the plurality of the set values, and displaying the set value corresponding to the refinement search on the display unit;
  • the setting input auxiliary device according to any one of Supplementary Item 4 to Supplementary Item 10, wherein at least one of the above is executed.
  • the printing conditions include the speed at which the recording medium travels through the printing machine body, the planar dimensions of the recording medium, the thickness of the recording medium, the type of the recording medium, and the printing machine body Item 13.
  • the setting input auxiliary device which is at least one of the number of colors used when printing on the recording medium.
  • the setting input auxiliary device according to any one of the above.
  • a printing unit that constitutes the printing machine main body and performs printing on the recording medium, A reversing unit for reversing the recording surface of the recording medium; A reversing part air ejecting device that ejects air toward the recording medium traveling through the reversing part; Comprising The camera images a portion of the reversing portion from which the air ejected by the reversing portion air ejection device is guided,
  • the setting input auxiliary device is a signal for adjusting the flow rate of the air ejected by the reversing unit air ejection device, and is one of the setting operation start signals.
  • the setting operation auxiliary area for flow rate setting which is a part for inputting a set value for adjusting the flow rate by controlling the air jet device for the reversing unit, Is displayed on the display unit,
  • the setting input assisting device according to any one of the supplementary items 2 to 13.
  • Appendix 16 The setting input assisting device according to any one of appendices 1 to 15, wherein a plurality of the cameras are provided for one setting target.
  • the printing machine 3 is configured to include the printing machine main body 900 shown in FIG.
  • the printing press control apparatus 400 includes a computer and controls each part of the printing press main body 900.
  • the printing press control apparatus 400 is electrically connected to, for example, a paper feeding unit 910, a printing unit 930, a reversing unit 950, and a paper discharge unit 960.
  • the printing press control apparatus 400 controls each unit of the printing press main body 900.
  • the printing press control device 400 is configured to include a printing press main body monitoring device 300.
  • the printing press main body monitoring device 300 is configured to be incorporated in the printing press control device 400 as a part of the printing press control device 400. That is, the configuration included in the printing press main body monitoring apparatus 300 is also the configuration included in the printing press control apparatus 400, and the procedure executed by the printing press main body monitoring apparatus 300 is also the procedure executed by the printing press control apparatus 400. Note that the printing press main body monitoring device 300 may be provided separately from the printing press control device 400 without being incorporated in the printing press control device 400.
  • the printing press main body monitor device 300 includes the setting input auxiliary device 100 of the first or second embodiment. Therefore, the printing press main body monitor device 300 of the present embodiment has the same effect as the effect of the setting input auxiliary device 100 of the first or second embodiment.
  • elements having the same functions as those in the first or second embodiment are denoted by the same reference numerals as those in the first or second embodiment, and description thereof is omitted.
  • the printing press main body monitor device 300 is configured by connecting an input unit 110, a display unit 120, and an imaging unit 150.
  • the printing press main body monitor device 300 is characterized in that a specific video out of each video acquired from the imaging unit 150 is displayed on the display unit 120 with emphasis over other video.
  • a specific video out of each video acquired from the imaging unit 150 is displayed on the display unit 120 with emphasis over other video.
  • how the printing press main body monitoring apparatus 300 displays a specific image on the display unit 120 with emphasis over other images will be described.
  • FIG. 13 is a configuration diagram schematically showing a display unit when displaying four screens.
  • the printing press main body monitor 300 displays, on the display unit 120, for example, a first video display unit 331, a second video display unit 332, a third video display unit 333, and a fourth video display.
  • the part 334 and the whole display part 135 are displayed.
  • the printing press main body monitor device 300 displays, for example, an image of the paper feeding unit 910 captured by the first camera 151 illustrated in FIG. 1 on the first video display unit 331. Further, the printing press main body monitor device 300 displays, for example, the video of the reversing unit 950 captured by the second camera 152 illustrated in FIG. 1 on the second video display unit 332.
  • the printing press main body monitor device 300 displays, on the third video display unit 333, for example, the video 1 of the paper discharge unit 960 captured by the third camera 153 shown in FIG.
  • the printing press main body monitor 300 displays, on the fourth video display unit 334, for example, the video 2 of the paper discharge unit 960 captured by the fourth camera 154 shown in FIG.
  • the operator when the operator selects a circle on the whole display unit 135 or the printing machine main unit monitor device 300 acquires predetermined various signals, the operator displays the whole display unit 135.
  • the video corresponding to the circle selected in step S1 and the video corresponding to various signals acquired by the printing press main body monitor apparatus 300 are highlighted and displayed.
  • the various signals are signals indicating the current state of the printing press main body 900 or signals for controlling the printing press main body 900.
  • the printing press main body monitor apparatus 300 emphasizes an image and displays it on the display unit 120 will be described.
  • FIG. 14 is a configuration diagram schematically showing a display unit when one screen is displayed. For example, when the operator selects a circle on the paper feed unit 910, an enlarged display unit 336 is displayed on the display unit 120 as shown in FIG.
  • the enlarged display unit 336 is a display unit having a larger area than the first video display unit 331 to the fourth video display unit 334 shown in FIG.
  • the printing press main body monitoring apparatus 300 does not display the first video display unit 331 to the fourth video display unit 334 on the display unit 120, and displays the enlarged display unit 336 on the display unit.
  • the entire display area of 120 is enlarged and displayed.
  • the printing machine main body monitoring apparatus 300 displays only the enlarged display unit 336 as shown in FIG. 14 from the screen on which the first video display unit 331 to the fourth video display unit 334 are displayed. Switch to the current screen. For example, when the operator selects the circle of the paper feed unit 910 on the overall display unit 135, the printing press main body monitor device 300 displays the video of the paper feed unit 910 acquired from the first camera 151 on the enlarged display unit 336. indicate. In this way, the printing press main body monitoring apparatus 300 can emphasize a specific image more than other images by enlarging and displaying the specific image on the display unit 120.
  • FIG. 15 is a configuration diagram schematically showing a display unit during pop-up display. Further, the printing press main body monitoring apparatus 300 displays the enlarged display unit 336 shown in FIG. 15 on the screen on which the first video display unit 331 to the fourth video display unit 334 shown in FIG. 13 are displayed. Also good. At this time, the enlarged display unit 336 is displayed closer to the operator than the first video display unit 331 to the fourth video display unit 334.
  • the printing press main body monitoring apparatus 300 pops up the enlarged display unit 336 on the screen on which the first video display unit 331 to the fourth video display unit 334 shown in FIG. 13 are displayed. Even in this case, the printing press main body monitor apparatus 300 can emphasize a specific video image more than other video images by enlarging and displaying the specific video image on the display unit 120.
  • FIG. 16 is a configuration diagram schematically showing a display unit when an emphasis frame is displayed. Further, the printing press main body monitoring apparatus 300 may display the emphasis frame 337 shown in FIG. 16 on the screen on which the first video display unit 331 to the fourth video display unit 334 shown in FIG. 13 are displayed. The emphasis frame 337 is displayed on the screen so as to surround any one of the first video display unit 331 to the fourth video display unit 334.
  • the printing press main body monitor device 300 displays the highlight frame 337 on the display unit 120 so as to surround the first video display unit 331.
  • the printing press main body monitoring device 300 is desired by the operator. The video can be emphasized.
  • the printing press main body monitoring apparatus 300 displays the first video display unit 331 in the center of the display area of the display unit 120 instead of displaying the highlight frame 337, thereby causing the first video display unit 331 to display the second video.
  • the display unit 332 may emphasize and display the fourth video display unit 334.
  • the printing machine main body monitoring device 300 also includes the first video display unit 331 even when the printing machine main body monitoring device 300 acquires predetermined various signals. Any video displayed on the fourth video display unit 334 is highlighted. The predetermined various signals will be described below.
  • the printer main body monitoring apparatus 300 displays a print start button 142 and a print stop button 143 on the display unit 120.
  • the printing press main body monitor device 300 acquires a print start signal from the print start button 142.
  • the print start button 142 is an electronic button displayed on the display unit 120 and is a virtual operation unit. Therefore, actually, when the printing press control device 400 detects that the operator operates the input unit 110 and operates the printing start button 142 instead of the print start button 142 generating the print start signal, the printing press control device 400 determines that a print start signal has been acquired.
  • the print start button 142 is not limited to the electronic button displayed on the display unit 120.
  • a mechanical push button that generates a signal by contacting two contact points when an operator pushes a movable part.
  • a button is also included. In this case, when the push button is operated by the operator, the printing press main body monitor device 300 acquires a print start signal from the push button.
  • the printing press main body monitoring apparatus 300 When the printing start signal is acquired, the printing press main body monitoring apparatus 300 first supplies the paper S as shown in FIGS. 14 to 16 before supplying the paper S from the paper feeding unit 910 to the printing unit 930 shown in FIG.
  • the image of the paper portion 910 is emphasized and displayed on the display unit 120.
  • the printing press main body monitoring apparatus 300 emphasizes and displays on the display unit 120 an image in which the guide plate 921, the front pad 922, and the paper pressing member 923 shown in FIG.
  • the operator confirms the image of the paper feed unit 910 displayed on the display unit 120.
  • the print displayed on the display unit 120 is displayed.
  • the start of printing can be stopped by operating the stop button 143.
  • the case where there is a possibility that a malfunction may occur in the paper feeding unit 910 is, for example, a case where the paper S remains discontinuously on the guide plate 921 shown in FIG. 2 when starting a new print job.
  • the printer main body 900 When starting a new print job, when the paper S starts to be supplied to the printing unit 930 in a state where the paper S remains discontinuously on the guide plate 921, the paper S remaining on the guide plate 921 is printed. When the new paper S is supplied to the printing unit 930 after being supplied to the printing unit 930, there is a time when the paper S is not supplied. Then, the printer main body 900 outputs a paper feed failure occurrence signal to the printer main body monitor device 300.
  • the failure occurrence mode is a mode in which when a failure occurs in the printing press main body 900, a warning sound is generated or a warning light is emitted to notify the operator of the occurrence of the failure.
  • the printing press main body 900 stops. Therefore, the operator needs to perform an operation of discharging the paper S remaining in the printing press main body 900 or an operation of canceling the failure occurrence mode of the printing press main body 900. These operations may increase the labor of the operator.
  • the printing machine main body monitoring apparatus 300 displays the image of the paper feeding unit 910 on the display unit 120 as shown in FIG. As a result, the operator can check whether or not the paper S remains on the guide plate 921 by viewing the first video display unit 331 of the display unit 120 without leaving the printing press main body monitor device 300.
  • the printing press main body monitoring apparatus 300 displays the image of the paper feeding unit 910 with emphasis over other images as shown in FIGS. As a result, the printing press main body monitoring apparatus 300 can emphasize and display that the paper S remains on the guide plate 921.
  • the operator When the operator confirms that the paper S remains on the guide plate 921, the operator operates the print stop button 143 before the supply of the paper S from the paper feeding unit 910 to the printing unit 930 is started. Thus, the start of printing can be stopped before the printing press main body 900 stops.
  • the printing machine main body monitoring apparatus 300 can suppress a possibility that new printing is started in a state where the paper S remains discontinuously on the guide plate 921.
  • the printing machine main body monitoring apparatus 300 can perform work caused by the printing machine main body 900 being in the failure occurrence mode, specifically, work for discharging the paper S remaining in the printing machine main body 900, It is possible to reduce the labor of the operator required for the operation of canceling the failure occurrence mode of the printing press main body 900.
  • the printing press control apparatus 400 waits for a predetermined time after the operator operates the print start button 142.
  • the printing press control device 400 controls the paper stacking device 911 and the paper feeding device 920 to supply the paper S from the paper supply unit 910 to the printing unit 930. .
  • the printing press control apparatus 400 controls the printing unit 930 to perform printing on one surface of the paper S by the first printing unit 931 and the second printing unit 932 of the printing unit 930.
  • the printing press control apparatus 400 controls the reversing unit 950 to invert the paper S. Then, the printing press control apparatus 400 controls the printing unit 930 to cause the third printing unit 933 and the fourth printing unit 934 to print on the other side of the paper S. Then, the printing press control apparatus 400 controls the paper discharge unit 960 to discharge the printed paper S. In this way, the printing press control apparatus 400 operates the printing press main body 900.
  • the printing press main body 900 may cause a paper jam in the paper supply unit 910, for example.
  • the paper S may be jammed between the paper pressing member 923 shown in FIG. 2 and the guide plate 921.
  • a paper feeding error may occur because the grip side St of the paper S is in contact with the front contact 922 at an angle.
  • the paper feed unit 910 outputs a paper feed failure occurrence signal to the printing press main body monitor device 300.
  • the printing press main body monitoring apparatus 300 acquires the paper feed failure occurrence signal, as shown in FIG. 13, from the screen displaying the first video display unit 331 to the fourth video display unit 334 on the display unit 120, As shown in FIGS. 14 to 16, the screen is automatically switched to a screen that emphasizes and displays the image of the paper feeding unit 910. As a result, the operator can check the video of the portion where the problem has occurred without operating the entire display unit 135.
  • the printing press main body 900 may not be able to correctly wind the paper S around the reversing cylinder 953 by the reversing unit 950, for example.
  • the printing machine main body 900 may damage the paper S because the paper S is wrinkled or a mark remains on the paper S.
  • the reversing unit 950 outputs a reversal failure occurrence signal to the printing press main body monitor device 300.
  • the screen from the first video display unit 331 to the fourth video display unit 334 is displayed on the display unit 120. 14 and the screen for displaying the video of the reversing unit 950 on the enlarged display unit 336 shown in FIG. 15, and the video of the reversing unit 950 is highlighted and displayed.
  • the printing press main body monitor device 300 displays the highlighted image by surrounding the second image display unit 332 on which the image of the reversing unit 950 is displayed with the emphasis frame 337 shown in FIG. As a result, the operator can check the video of the portion where the problem has occurred without operating the entire display unit 135.
  • the printing press main body 900 may not correctly discharge the paper S by the paper discharge unit 960, for example.
  • the printing machine main body 900 may cause the paper S to fall from the belt or damage the paper S.
  • the paper discharge unit 960 outputs a paper discharge failure occurrence signal to the printing press main body monitor device 300.
  • the printing press main body monitoring apparatus 300 acquires the paper discharge failure occurrence signal, as shown in FIG. 13, from the screen displaying the first video display unit 331 to the fourth video display unit 334 on the display unit 120, The screen is switched to a screen for displaying the image of the paper discharge unit 960 on the enlarged display unit 336 shown in FIGS. 14 and 15, and the video of the paper discharge unit 960 is highlighted and displayed.
  • the printing press main body monitor device 300 may display two images, the image captured by the third camera 153 and the image captured by the fourth camera 154, on the enlarged display unit 336, or one of them may be displayed on the enlarged display unit. 336 may be displayed.
  • the printing press main body monitor device 300 may be configured such that the operator can select the video to be displayed on the enlarged display unit 336 from two images captured by the third camera 153 and the image captured by the fourth camera 154.
  • the first camera 151 captures at least one of the image captured by the third camera 153 and the image captured by the fourth camera 154. What is necessary is just to emphasize and display on the display part 120 rather than the image
  • the printing press main body monitoring apparatus 300 emphasizes by enclosing the third video display unit 333 and the fourth video display unit 334 on which the video of the paper discharge unit 960 is displayed with the emphasis frame 337 shown in FIG. To display.
  • the operator can check the video of the portion where the problem has occurred without operating the entire display unit 135.
  • control device displays the location of the troubled part
  • the operator can confirm by visually checking each part of the printing machine body away from the control device, or It is necessary to switch the video by operating.
  • the printing machine main body monitoring apparatus 300 automatically highlights and displays an image of the part where the trouble occurs on the display unit 120. As a result, the operator can grasp the part where the problem has occurred without examining where in the printing machine body 900 the problem has occurred. Furthermore, the operator can confirm the image of the site where the problem has occurred without operating the overall display unit 135 and without leaving the printing press main body monitor device 300.
  • the printing press main body monitoring apparatus 300 automatically highlights and displays the image of the paper feeding unit 910 on the display unit 120 before the supply of the paper S from the paper feeding unit 910 to the printing unit 930 starts. .
  • the printing press main body monitoring apparatus 300 can reduce the trouble of manually switching the video displayed on the display unit 120 by the operator.
  • the printing press main body monitor device 300 can It is possible to suppress the printer main body 900 from being stopped and being in the failure occurrence mode. As a result, the printing press main body monitoring apparatus 300 can reduce the labor of the operator required for the work of discharging the paper S remaining inside the printing press main body 900 and the work for canceling the malfunction occurrence mode of the printing press main body 900.
  • the printing press main body monitoring apparatus 300 can confirm the part where the trouble has occurred without leaving the operator from the printing press main body monitoring apparatus 300. In this way, the printing press main body monitor device 300 can reduce the labor of the operator.
  • each camera of the imaging unit 150 has been described as being attached to the paper feeding unit 910, the reversing unit 950, and the paper discharge unit 960.
  • the camera of the imaging unit 150 is a printer main body. It may be attached to other parts of 900.
  • the printing machine main body monitoring device 300 is provided at the part where the problem occurs. Any configuration may be used as long as the image captured by the camera is automatically displayed on the display unit 120.
  • the printing machine main body monitoring device 300 displays a video of the paper feeding unit 910 captured by the camera when a malfunction occurs in the paper feeding unit 910. 120 is automatically displayed. At this time, the printing press main body monitor 300 automatically enlarges the image of the paper feeding unit 910 and automatically displays it on the display unit 120, for example.
  • the printing machine main body monitoring apparatus 300 may display, for example, images of each part of the rotary printing machine on the display unit 120.
  • the printing machine main body monitoring apparatus 300 includes, for example, a camera that images a paster unit that performs paper splicing. When a signal for starting paper splicing is acquired, the video of the paster unit is automatically emphasized on the display unit 120. Display.
  • the printing press main body monitor device 300 does not require the operator to manually switch the image, so that it is possible to reduce the trouble of the operator.
  • the video displayed on the display unit 120 is not limited to a smooth moving image, and may be a so-called dropped frame moving image in which still images are continuously displayed.
  • the video displayed on the display unit 120 only needs to have a quality that allows the operator to grasp the cause of the malfunction by looking at the enlarged display unit 336, for example.
  • the printing press main body monitoring device 300 reduces the trouble of the administrator who manages the printing press main body 900 and the maintenance worker who maintains the printing press main body 900 in addition to the trouble of the operator of the printing press main body 900. Functions can also be realized.
  • the configuration of the printing press main body monitor apparatus 300 for that purpose will be described below.
  • the printing press main body monitor apparatus 300 includes, for example, a camera server 160 shown in FIG.
  • the video recorded by the camera server 160 may be all four videos displayed on the fourth video display unit 334 from the first video display unit 331 or only the video selected by the operator from the four videos. Good.
  • the printing machine main body monitoring device 300 has an image that is automatically emphasized and displayed on the display unit 120, specifically, an image of the paper feeding unit 910 immediately after the print start button 142 is operated, or a problem has occurred.
  • the configuration may be such that the video of the part is automatically recorded and stored in the storage device 161.
  • the printing press main body monitoring apparatus 300 may be configured to record a video of a site where the problem occurs for a predetermined period before and after the problem occurs, and store the recorded video on a silicon disk.
  • the printing press main body monitoring apparatus 300 always records all the videos of each part of the printing press main body 900 and stores them in the storage device 161, and deletes the recorded video after a predetermined period from the storage device 161. If a malfunction occurs in the printing press main body 900, the video of the part where the malfunction occurred is recorded as a recorded video before the malfunction occurred, and a recorded video recorded for a predetermined period after the malfunction occurred. On a silicon disk.
  • the printing press main body monitoring device 300 can store the recorded video of each part of the printing press main body 900 on the silicon disk connected to the removable storage device connecting device 162. Thereby, for example, a maintenance worker who performs maintenance of the printing press main body 900 can easily check the recorded video of each part of the printing press main body 900 when the malfunction occurs in the printing press main body 900 by taking the silicon disk home. . Therefore, the printing press main body monitoring device 300 can reduce the labor of a maintenance worker who maintains the printing press main body 900.
  • the setting input assist device, the printing press main body monitoring device, and the printing press are useful for an operator to input setting values to be set, and are suitable for reducing the amount of work for the operator.

Landscapes

  • Engineering & Computer Science (AREA)
  • Quality & Reliability (AREA)
  • Multimedia (AREA)
  • Signal Processing (AREA)
  • Inking, Control Or Cleaning Of Printing Machines (AREA)

Abstract

A setting input assisting device comprising a camera which is provided on a printer body performing printing on a medium to be recorded, and captures an image of a setting target which configures a part the printer body; and at least one display unit (120) to display information necessary for controlling the setting target, wherein a setting button is displayed on the display unit (120), and when a setting operation start signal which is a signal acquired when the setting button is operated, is acquired, a setting target vision display unit (136) which displays a vision of the setting target, and a setting operation assisting area (147) which displays images to assist the input of setting values for controlling the setting target, are displayed on the display unit (120).

Description

設定入力補助装置及び印刷機本体モニター装置ならびに印刷機Setting input auxiliary device, printing machine main body monitoring device and printing machine
 本発明は、印刷機本体の設定の入力を補助する設定入力補助装置及び、印刷機本体を監視する印刷機本体モニター装置ならびに、前記設定入力補助装置または印刷機本体モニター装置を含んで構成される印刷機に関する。 The present invention includes a setting input auxiliary device that assists in inputting settings of a printing press main body, a printing press main body monitoring device that monitors the printing press main body, and the setting input auxiliary device or the printing press main body monitoring device. It relates to a printing machine.
 従来、オペレーターが印刷機制御装置を操作して印刷機本体を制御するために必要な情報を表示する表示部を含んで構成される印刷機制御装置がある。例えば、特許文献1には、通常使用時用のモニターと、異常時用のモニターとが分けて設けられることで、通常使用時に見易く、異常時メンテナンスの容易なモニター装置が開示されている。 Conventionally, there is a printing press control apparatus configured to include a display unit that displays information necessary for an operator to operate the printing press control apparatus to control the printing press main body. For example, Patent Document 1 discloses a monitor device that is easy to see during normal use and easy to maintain during abnormal use by providing a monitor for normal use and a monitor for abnormal use separately.
実開平5-16310号公報Japanese Utility Model Publication No. 5-16310
 ここで、一般的に、オペレーターが印刷機制御装置を操作して、印刷機本体の各部を制御する場合、オペレーターは、制御しようとする印刷機本体の部位を目視して確認しながら、印刷機制御装置を操作する必要がある場合がある。 Here, generally, when an operator operates the printing press control device to control each part of the printing press main body, the operator visually checks and confirms the portion of the printing press main body to be controlled, It may be necessary to operate the controller.
 例えば、印刷機本体には、空気を被記録媒体に吹き付ける空気噴出装置がある。オペレーターは、印刷機制御装置を操作することで、被記録媒体に吹き付ける空気を調節する。しかしながら、被記録媒体に吹き付ける空気の流量を調節する際には、オペレーターは、印刷機制御装置から離れて、実際に空気噴出装置を目視する必要がある。 For example, the printing machine main body has an air ejection device that blows air onto a recording medium. The operator adjusts the air blown to the recording medium by operating the printing press control device. However, when adjusting the flow rate of the air blown onto the recording medium, the operator needs to leave the printing press control device and actually observe the air ejection device.
 特許文献1の技術でも、印刷機本体の各部を操作する際、オペレーターは、印刷機制御装置から離れて、制御する対象の装置を実際に目視して確認しつつ、印刷機制御装置を操作する必要がある。 Even in the technique of Patent Document 1, when operating each part of the printing press body, the operator operates the printing press control device while actually observing and confirming the device to be controlled apart from the printing press control device. There is a need.
 これにより、従来の技術では、印刷機本体を制御するために、印刷機制御装置を操作する第1のオペレーターと、制御する対象の装置を目視して、制御する対象の装置の様子を第1のオペレーターに伝える第2のオペレーターとの2人のオペレーターが必要になる場合がある。 Accordingly, in the conventional technique, in order to control the printing press main body, the first operator who operates the printing press control device and the device to be controlled are visually checked and the state of the control target device is first described. There may be a need for two operators to communicate with a second operator.
 または、従来の技術では、1人のオペレーターで印刷機本体を制御する場合は、印刷機制御装置を操作する手順と、印刷機制御装置から離れて、制御する対象の装置を目視して制御する対象の装置の様子を確認する手順と、の2つの手順を繰り返しオペレーターが実行する必要がある。 Alternatively, in the conventional technology, when a single operator controls the printing press main body, the procedure for operating the printing press control device and the control target device are visually controlled away from the printing press control device. It is necessary for the operator to repeatedly execute the two procedures of confirming the state of the target device.
 以上のように、従来の印刷機制御装置では、印刷機本体を制御するために必要なオペレーターの作業量を十分には低減できていない。 As described above, the conventional printer control device cannot sufficiently reduce the amount of operator work required to control the printer main body.
 本発明は、上記に鑑みてなされたものであって、オペレーターの作業量を低減することを目的とする。 The present invention has been made in view of the above, and an object thereof is to reduce the amount of work for an operator.
 上述した課題を解決し、目的を達成するために、本発明に係る設定入力補助装置は、被記録媒体に印刷を施す印刷機本体に設けられて、前記印刷機本体を構成する一部である設定対象を撮像するカメラと、前記設定対象を制御するために必要な情報を表示する少なくとも1つの表示部と、が接続される設定入力補助装置であって、前記設定入力補助装置は、前記設定対象の設定をこれから開始する操作を補助する画像が表示される設定開始操作補助域を前記表示部に表示し、前記設定対象の設定をこれから開始する操作に基づいて、前記設定対象の映像と、前記設定対象を制御するための設定値の入力を補助する画像を表示する設定操作補助域と、を前記表示部に表示することを特徴とする。 In order to solve the above-described problems and achieve the object, a setting input auxiliary device according to the present invention is a part of the printer main body that is provided in a printer main body that performs printing on a recording medium. A setting input auxiliary device to which a camera that captures an image of a setting target and at least one display unit that displays information necessary for controlling the setting target are connected, wherein the setting input auxiliary device A setting start operation auxiliary area in which an image for assisting an operation for starting setting of an object is displayed is displayed on the display unit, and based on an operation for starting setting of the setting object from now on, the setting target video, A setting operation assisting area for displaying an image for assisting input of a setting value for controlling the setting target is displayed on the display unit.
 上述した課題を解決し、目的を達成するために、本発明に係る印刷機制御装置は、被記録媒体に印刷を施す印刷機本体に設けられて、前記印刷機本体を構成する一部である設定対象を撮像するカメラと、前記設定対象を制御するために必要な情報を表示する少なくとも1つの表示部と、が接続される印刷機制御装置であって、前記印刷機制御装置は、前記設定対象の設定をこれから開始する操作を補助する画像が表示される設定開始操作補助域を前記表示部に表示し、前記設定対象の設定をこれから開始する操作に基づいて、前記設定対象の映像と、前記設定対象を制御するための設定値の入力を補助する画像を表示する設定操作補助域と、を前記表示部に表示することを特徴とする。 In order to solve the above-described problems and achieve the object, a printing press control apparatus according to the present invention is provided in a printing press main body that performs printing on a recording medium, and is a part of the printing press main body. A printing press control device to which a camera that images a setting target and at least one display unit that displays information necessary to control the setting target is connected, wherein the printing press control device A setting start operation auxiliary area in which an image for assisting an operation for starting setting of an object is displayed is displayed on the display unit, and based on an operation for starting setting of the setting object from now on, the setting target video, A setting operation assisting area for displaying an image for assisting input of a setting value for controlling the setting target is displayed on the display unit.
 上述した課題を解決し、目的を達成するために、本発明に係る印刷機は、被記録媒体に印刷を施す印刷部と、前記印刷部に前記被記録媒体を供給する給紙部と、前記被記録媒体の被記録面を反転させる反転部と、前記印刷部で印刷が施された前記被記録媒体を排出する排紙部と、前記印刷部と、前記給紙部と、前記反転部と、前記排紙部とのうち少なくとも1つに設けられて設定対象を撮像するカメラと、前記設定対象を制御するために必要な情報を表示する少なくとも1つの表示部と、が接続される印刷機であって、前記印刷機は、前記設定対象の設定をこれから開始する操作を補助する画像が表示される設定開始操作補助域を前記表示部に表示し、前記設定対象の設定をこれから開始する操作に基づいて、前記設定対象の映像と、前記設定対象を制御するための設定値の入力を補助する画像を表示する設定操作補助域と、を前記表示部に表示することを特徴とする。 In order to solve the above-described problems and achieve the object, a printing machine according to the present invention includes a printing unit that performs printing on a recording medium, a paper feeding unit that supplies the recording medium to the printing unit, A reversing unit for reversing the recording surface of the recording medium, a paper discharging unit for discharging the recording medium printed by the printing unit, the printing unit, the paper feeding unit, and the reversing unit, A printer that is connected to at least one of the paper discharge units and that captures a setting target and at least one display unit that displays information necessary to control the setting target The printing press displays a setting start operation auxiliary area in which an image for assisting an operation for starting the setting target setting is displayed on the display unit, and starts the setting target setting from now on. Based on the video to be set and the And displaying setting and assist area that displays an image for assisting the input of the setting value for controlling a constant object to the display unit.
 ここで、前記設定入力補助装置は、前記設定対象の設定をこれから開始する操作がなされると、設定操作開始信号を取得し、前記設定操作開始信号を取得すると、前記設定対象の映像と、前記設定操作補助域と、を前記表示部に表示することが望ましい。 Here, the setting input auxiliary device acquires a setting operation start signal when an operation for starting the setting of the setting target is performed, and acquires the setting operation start signal. It is desirable to display the setting operation auxiliary area on the display unit.
 上記構成により、本発明に係る設定入力補助装置及び印刷機制御装置ならびに印刷機を用いれば、オペレーターは、設定入力補助装置から離れずに、手元で設定対象の映像を確認しながら、設定値を設定操作補助域に入力して制御対象の設定を行うことができる。よって、本発明に係る本発明に係る設定入力補助装置及び印刷機制御装置ならびに印刷機は、オペレーターの作業量を低減できる。 With the configuration described above, if the setting input auxiliary device, the printing press control device, and the printing press according to the present invention are used, the operator can set the setting value while checking the setting target image at hand without leaving the setting input auxiliary device. The control target can be set by inputting to the setting operation auxiliary area. Therefore, the setting input auxiliary device, the printing press control device, and the printing press according to the present invention according to the present invention can reduce the amount of work for the operator.
 本発明の好ましい態様としては、前記設定対象は複数存在し、前記カメラは、複数の前記設定対象にそれぞれ設けられ、前記複数の前記設定対象のうちの1つである特定設定対象の設定をこれから開始する際に取得する信号であって、前記設定操作開始信号の1つである特定設定操作開始信号を取得すると、前記特定設定対象の映像と、前記設定操作補助域として、前記特定設定対象を制御するための設定値の入力を補助する画像を表示する特定設定操作補助域と、を前記表示部に表示することが望ましい。 As a preferred aspect of the present invention, there are a plurality of setting objects, the camera is provided in each of the plurality of setting objects, and a setting of a specific setting object that is one of the plurality of setting objects is set. When a specific setting operation start signal that is one of the setting operation start signals is acquired as a signal to be acquired when starting, the specific setting target is used as the specific setting target video and the setting operation auxiliary area. It is desirable to display a specific setting operation auxiliary area for displaying an image for assisting input of a setting value for control on the display unit.
 上記構成により、本発明に係る設定入力補助装置及び印刷機は、複数の設定対象の映像の中から、特定設定対象の映像を自動で表示部に表示する。よって、本発明に係る設定入力補助装置及び印刷機を用いれば、オペレーターは、映像を手動で切り替える必要がない。これにより、本発明に係る設定入力補助装置及び印刷機は、さらに好適にオペレーターの作業量を低減できる。 With the above configuration, the setting input auxiliary device and the printing press according to the present invention automatically display a specific setting target video on a display unit from among a plurality of setting target videos. Therefore, if the setting input auxiliary device and the printing press according to the present invention are used, the operator does not need to manually switch the video. Thereby, the setting input auxiliary device and the printing press according to the present invention can more suitably reduce the work amount of the operator.
 本発明の好ましい態様としては、前記設定操作開始信号を取得すると、あらかじめ設定された前記設定値を選択する部分であるプリセット選択部を前記表示部に表示することが望ましい。 As a preferred aspect of the present invention, when the setting operation start signal is acquired, it is desirable to display a preset selection unit which is a part for selecting the preset setting value on the display unit.
 上記構成により、本発明に係る設定入力補助装置は、オペレーターがプリセット選択部を操作して、例示されているプリセット値を選択することによって、設定操作補助域に設定値を入力せずに、設定対象の設定を完了できる。よって、本発明に係る設定入力補助装置及び印刷機は、オペレーターの作業量を低減できる。 With the above configuration, the setting input auxiliary device according to the present invention can be set without inputting the setting value in the setting operation auxiliary area by the operator operating the preset selection unit and selecting the preset value illustrated. The target setting can be completed. Therefore, the setting input auxiliary device and the printing press according to the present invention can reduce the amount of work for the operator.
 本発明の好ましい態様としては、情報を記憶する記憶手段を備え、前記カメラが撮像した映像のうちの少なくとも一部を記憶手段に格納することが望ましい。 As a preferred aspect of the present invention, it is desirable to provide storage means for storing information, and to store at least a part of the video captured by the camera in the storage means.
 上記構成により、本発明に係る設定入力補助装置は、印刷が終わった後であっても、印刷機本体の各部の映像を確認できる。 With the above configuration, the setting input auxiliary device according to the present invention can check the video of each part of the printing press body even after printing is finished.
 本発明の好ましい態様としては、前記カメラが撮像した映像のうちの少なくとも一部を、前記設定入力補助装置が接続される通信回線を介して前記設定入力補助装置の外部に提供することが望ましい。 As a preferred aspect of the present invention, it is desirable to provide at least a part of an image captured by the camera to the outside of the setting input auxiliary device via a communication line to which the setting input auxiliary device is connected.
 上記構成により、本発明に係る設定入力補助装置を用いれば、印刷機が設けられている設備から離れた場所に配置される映像表示装置、例えば、パーソナルコンピュータからも、印刷機本体の各部の様子を確認できる。 With the above configuration, when the setting input auxiliary device according to the present invention is used, the state of each part of the printing press main body can be displayed from a video display device, for example, a personal computer, which is arranged at a location away from the equipment provided with the printing press. Can be confirmed.
 本発明の好ましい態様としては、前記印刷機本体を構成し、前記被記録媒体に印刷を施す印刷部は、前記被記録媒体の被記録面を反転させる反転部と、前記反転部を走行する前記被記録媒体に向かって空気を噴出する反転部用空気噴出装置と、を含んで構成され、前記カメラは、反転部の部分のうち、前記反転部用空気噴出装置が噴出する前記空気が導かれる部分を撮像し、前記設定入力補助装置は、前記反転部用空気噴出装置が噴出する前記空気の流量を調節するための信号であって、前記設定操作開始信号の1つである反転部用空気噴出装置設定操作信号を取得すると、前記反転部用空気噴出装置が噴出する前記空気が導かれる部分の映像と、前記反転部用空気噴出装置を制御して前記流量を調節するための設定値を入力する部分である流量設定用の前記設定操作補助域と、を前記表示部に表示することが望ましい。 As a preferred aspect of the present invention, a printing unit that constitutes the printing machine main body and performs printing on the recording medium includes a reversing unit that reverses a recording surface of the recording medium, and the reversing unit that travels the reversing unit. A reversing unit air ejecting device that ejects air toward the recording medium, and the camera guides the air ejected by the reversing unit air ejecting device out of the reversing unit. The setting input auxiliary device is a signal for adjusting the flow rate of the air ejected by the reversing unit air ejecting device, and is one of the setting operation start signals. When the ejection device setting operation signal is acquired, an image of a portion of the air guided by the reversing unit air ejection device and a setting value for controlling the flow rate by controlling the reversing unit air ejection device are obtained. The part to input It is desirable to display said setting assist area for flow setting, to the display unit.
 上記構成により、本発明に係る設定入力補助装置及び印刷機を用いれば、オペレーターは、設定入力補助装置から離れて反転部を目視せずに、手元で反転部の映像を確認しながら、設定値を設定操作補助域に入力して反転部の設定を行うことができる。よって、本発明に係る設定入力補助装置及び印刷機は、オペレーターの作業量を低減できる。 With the configuration described above, if the setting input auxiliary device and the printing press according to the present invention are used, the operator can check the video of the reversing unit at hand without leaving the setting input auxiliary device and visually observing the reversing unit. Can be set in the setting operation auxiliary area to set the reversing unit. Therefore, the setting input auxiliary device and the printing press according to the present invention can reduce the amount of work for the operator.
 本発明の好ましい態様としては、前記記憶手段は、複数の被記録媒体が順次走行する様子が撮像された映像から、特定の被記録媒体が撮像された部分を抽出するための特定情報を格納することが望ましい。そして、本発明の好ましい態様としては、前記複数の被記録媒体の中から特定の被記録媒体を指定する操作がなされると、前記特定情報に基づいて、前記カメラが撮像した映像から前記特定の被記録媒体が撮像された部分を抽出し、前記特定の被記録媒体が撮像された部分の映像を前記表示部に表示させることが望ましい。 As a preferred aspect of the present invention, the storage means stores specific information for extracting a portion where a specific recording medium is imaged from an image where a plurality of recording media are sequentially traveling. It is desirable. According to a preferred aspect of the present invention, when an operation for designating a specific recording medium is performed from among the plurality of recording media, the specific image is captured from an image captured by the camera based on the specific information. It is preferable to extract a portion where the recording medium is imaged and display an image of the portion where the specific recording medium is imaged on the display unit.
 これにより、本発明に係る設定入力補助装置は、特定の被記録媒体が撮像された映像を表示部に表示させることができる。オペレーターは、表示部に表示される映像を見ることによって、印刷機本体による被記録媒体への印刷の様子を過去に遡って確認できる。よって、本発明に係る設定入力補助装置は、被記録媒体が印刷機本体の各部を走行する際の被記録媒体の様子をより詳細にオペレーターに提供できる。 Thereby, the setting input auxiliary device according to the present invention can display a video image of a specific recording medium on the display unit. The operator can confirm the state of printing on the recording medium by the printer main body by looking back at the video displayed on the display unit. Therefore, the setting input auxiliary device according to the present invention can provide the operator with the details of the state of the recording medium when the recording medium travels through each part of the printing machine main body.
 本発明の好ましい態様としては、前記カメラが複数設けられ、前記複数の被記録媒体の中から特定の被記録媒体を指定する操作がなされると、前記特定情報に基づいて、前記カメラが撮像した映像から前記特定の被記録媒体が撮像された部分を前記カメラ毎に特定し、前記特定の被記録媒体が撮像された部分の映像を前記カメラ毎に前記表示部に表示させることが望ましい。 As a preferred aspect of the present invention, when a plurality of the cameras are provided and an operation for designating a specific recording medium from the plurality of recording media is performed, the camera captures an image based on the specific information. It is preferable that a part where the specific recording medium is imaged is specified for each camera from a video, and a video of a part where the specific recording medium is captured is displayed on the display unit for each camera.
 これにより、本発明に係る設定入力補助装置は、特定の被記録媒体の軌跡を追うようにして、被記録媒体が撮像された映像を表示部に表示させることができる。オペレーターは、表示部に表示される映像を見ることによって、印刷機本体による被記録媒体への印刷の様子を過去に遡って確認できる。よって、本発明に係る設定入力補助装置は、被記録媒体が印刷機本体の各部を走行する際の被記録媒体の様子をより詳細にオペレーターに提供できる。 Thereby, the setting input auxiliary device according to the present invention can display the video image of the recording medium on the display unit so as to follow the trajectory of the specific recording medium. The operator can confirm the state of printing on the recording medium by the printer main body by looking back at the video displayed on the display unit. Therefore, the setting input auxiliary device according to the present invention can provide the operator with the details of the state of the recording medium when the recording medium travels through each part of the printing machine main body.
 本発明の好ましい態様としては、前記特定の被記録媒体が撮像された部分の映像を前記表示部に表示させる際、前記特定の被記録媒体が撮像された時の印刷条件を前記表示部に表示させることが望ましい。 As a preferred aspect of the present invention, when displaying an image of a portion where the specific recording medium is imaged on the display unit, a printing condition when the specific recording medium is imaged is displayed on the display unit. It is desirable to make it.
 これにより、本発明に係る設定入力補助装置は、映像と、印刷条件の情報とを同じ画面でオペレーターに提供できる。よって、本発明に係る設定入力補助装置を用いれば、オペレーターは、映像と、その映像が撮像された時の印刷条件との関係を見出しやすくなる。例えば、印刷機本体を走行した被記録媒体に不具合があった場合、本発明に係る設定入力補助装置を用いれば、オペレーターは、その不具合が生じた際の様子を映像で確認できると共に、その時の印刷条件を見て、その不具合が生じた原因を特定しやすくなる。 Thereby, the setting input auxiliary device according to the present invention can provide the operator with the video and the printing condition information on the same screen. Therefore, if the setting input auxiliary device according to the present invention is used, the operator can easily find the relationship between the video and the printing condition when the video is captured. For example, if there is a problem with the recording medium that has run through the printing machine main body, the setting input auxiliary device according to the present invention allows the operator to check the situation when the problem has occurred on the video, and at that time It becomes easier to identify the cause of the failure by looking at the printing conditions.
 本発明の好ましい態様としては、前記カメラが撮像した映像を記憶する記憶手段を備え、前記プリセット選択部に表示されている前記設定値のリストのうちの特定の設定値が選択されると、選択された設定値で被記録媒体が前記印刷機本体を走行した際に前記カメラが撮像した映像を、前記記憶手段から取得して前記表示部に表示させることが望ましい。 As a preferred aspect of the present invention, the image processing apparatus includes a storage unit that stores an image captured by the camera and is selected when a specific setting value is selected from the list of setting values displayed on the preset selection unit. It is desirable that an image captured by the camera when the recording medium travels through the printing press main body with the set value is acquired from the storage unit and displayed on the display unit.
 これにより、本発明に係る設定入力補助装置を用いれば、オペレーターは、選択した設定値での被記録媒体への印刷が良好か否かを表示部に表示される映像を見て判定できる。これにより、本発明に係る設定入力補助装置を用いれば、オペレーターは、より容易に良好な設定値を探し出せる。 Thus, by using the setting input auxiliary device according to the present invention, the operator can determine whether or not the printing on the recording medium with the selected setting value is good by looking at the video displayed on the display unit. Thereby, if the setting input auxiliary device according to the present invention is used, the operator can more easily find a good setting value.
 本発明の好ましい態様としては、前記選択された設定値で被記録媒体が前記印刷機本体を走行した際に前記カメラが撮像した映像と共に、前記カメラが現在撮像している映像を前記表示部に表示させることが望ましい。 As a preferred aspect of the present invention, an image currently captured by the camera is displayed on the display unit together with an image captured by the camera when the recording medium travels through the printer main body at the selected setting value. It is desirable to display.
 これにより、本発明に係る設定入力補助装置を用いれば、オペレーターは、2つの映像を比較しながら、カメラが現在撮像している映像が、選択された設定値で被記録媒体が印刷機本体を走行した際にカメラが撮像した映像よりも良好な映像(被記録媒体のバタつきを低減できている映像)となるように、プリセット選択部を操作できる。これにより、本発明に係る設定入力補助装置を用いれば、オペレーターはより容易に良好な設定値を探し出せる。 Thus, using the setting input auxiliary device according to the present invention, the operator compares the two images, and the image currently captured by the camera is the selected set value and the recording medium is the main body of the printing machine. The preset selection unit can be operated so that the video is better than the video captured by the camera when the vehicle travels (video in which the flutter of the recording medium can be reduced). Thereby, if the setting input auxiliary device according to the present invention is used, the operator can more easily find a good setting value.
 本発明の好ましい態様としては、前記プリセット選択部に表示される前記リストに含まれる複数の前記設定値を印刷条件に基づいて並べ替えて前記表示部に表示させることと、前記複数の前記設定値に対して前記印刷条件で絞り込み検索を行い、前記絞り込み検索で該当した設定値を前記表示部に表示させることと、のうちの少なくとも1つを実行することが望ましい。 As a preferred aspect of the present invention, a plurality of the setting values included in the list displayed in the preset selection unit are rearranged based on printing conditions and displayed on the display unit, and the plurality of the setting values It is preferable to perform at least one of performing a refinement search with respect to the print condition and displaying the set value corresponding to the refinement search on the display unit.
 記憶装置に格納されている設定値の数が膨大になると、オペレーターはプリセット選択部から所望する設定値を探し出すことが困難になる。しかしながら、本発明に係る設定入力補助装置は、上記構成により、今回の印刷ジョブに印刷条件が近い設定値を優先的に表示できる。よって、本発明に係る設定入力補助装置を用いれば、オペレーターは、所望する設定値をより容易に探し出せる。 When the number of setting values stored in the storage device becomes enormous, it becomes difficult for the operator to find a desired setting value from the preset selection unit. However, the setting input auxiliary device according to the present invention can preferentially display setting values having printing conditions close to those of the current print job by the above configuration. Therefore, if the setting input auxiliary device according to the present invention is used, the operator can more easily find a desired setting value.
 本発明の好ましい態様としては、前記印刷条件は、被記録媒体が前記印刷機本体を走行する速度と、前記被記録媒体の平面寸法と、前記被記録媒体の厚さと、前記被記録媒体の種類と、前記印刷機本体が前記被記録媒体に印刷を施す際に用いられる色数と、のうちの少なくとも1つであることが望ましい。 In a preferred aspect of the present invention, the printing conditions include: a speed at which the recording medium travels through the printing machine body, a planar dimension of the recording medium, a thickness of the recording medium, and a type of the recording medium And at least one of the number of colors used when the printing machine main body performs printing on the recording medium.
 上述した課題を解決し、目的を達成するために、本発明に係る印刷機本体モニター装置は、被記録媒体に印刷を施す印刷機本体に少なくとも1つ設けられて前記印刷機本体の各部を撮像するカメラと、前記カメラから取得した映像を表示する表示部と、が接続され、かつ、上述の設定入力補助装置を含み、前記カメラが撮像した映像であって、前記印刷機本体の状態に対応した映像を、強調して前記表示部に表示することを特徴とする。 In order to solve the above-described problems and achieve the object, at least one printing machine main body monitoring device according to the present invention is provided in a printing machine main body that performs printing on a recording medium, and images each part of the printing machine main body. And a display unit for displaying the video acquired from the camera, and includes the setting input auxiliary device described above, and is a video captured by the camera, corresponding to the state of the printing press main body. The displayed video is emphasized and displayed on the display unit.
 また、上述した課題を解決し、目的を達成するために、本発明に係る印刷機制御装置は、被記録媒体に印刷を施す印刷機本体と接続されて前記印刷機本体の各部を制御する印刷機制御装置であって、前記印刷機本体に少なくとも1つ設けられて前記印刷機本体の前記各部を撮像するカメラと、前記カメラから取得した映像を表示する表示部と、が接続される印刷機制御装置であって、前記印刷機制御装置は、前記カメラが撮像した映像であって、前記印刷機本体の状態に対応した映像を、強調して前記表示部に表示することを特徴とする。 In order to solve the above-described problems and achieve the object, a printing press control apparatus according to the present invention is connected to a printing press main body that performs printing on a recording medium, and controls each part of the printing press main body. A printer that is provided with at least one camera that is provided in the main body of the printing machine and that captures the respective parts of the main body of the printing machine, and a display unit that displays an image acquired from the camera. A control device, wherein the printing press control device emphasizes and displays an image captured by the camera corresponding to a state of the printing press main body on the display unit.
 また、上述した課題を解決し、目的を達成するために、本発明に係る印刷機は、被記録媒体に印刷を施す印刷部と、前記印刷部に前記被記録媒体を供給する給紙部と、前記被記録媒体の被記録面を反転させる反転部と、前記印刷部で印刷が施された前記被記録媒体を排出する排紙部と、前記印刷部と、前記給紙部と、前記反転部と、前記排紙部とのうち少なくとも1つに設けられて対象を撮像するカメラと、前記カメラから取得した映像を表示する表示部と、が接続される印刷機であって、前記印刷機は、前記カメラが撮像した映像であって、前記印刷機本体の状態に対応した映像を、強調して前記表示部に表示することを特徴とする。 In order to solve the above-described problems and achieve the object, a printing machine according to the present invention includes a printing unit that performs printing on a recording medium, and a paper feeding unit that supplies the recording medium to the printing unit. A reversing unit for reversing a recording surface of the recording medium, a paper discharging unit for discharging the recording medium printed by the printing unit, the printing unit, the paper feeding unit, and the reversing unit A printer that is provided in at least one of the printer unit and the paper discharge unit and that captures an image of a target, and a display unit that displays an image acquired from the camera. Is an image picked up by the camera and corresponding to the state of the printer main body, and is displayed on the display unit with emphasis.
 ここで、前記印刷機本体の状態に対応した前記映像は、前記印刷機本体の現在の状態を示す信号、または、前記印刷機本体を制御するための信号の各種信号に対応した映像であることが望ましい。 Here, the video corresponding to the state of the printing press main body is a video corresponding to a signal indicating the current state of the printing press main body or various signals for controlling the printing press main body. Is desirable.
 また、前記カメラは、前記印刷機本体に複数設けられて、前記印刷機本体モニター装置は、前記カメラが撮像した複数の映像のうち、前記印刷機本体の状態に対応した映像を、他の映像よりも強調して前記表示部に表示することが望ましい。 In addition, a plurality of the cameras are provided in the printing machine main body, and the printing machine main body monitoring device displays a video corresponding to the state of the printing machine main body among a plurality of videos captured by the camera. It is desirable to display it on the display unit with more emphasis.
 上記構成により、本発明に係る印刷機本体モニター装置及び印刷機制御装置ならびに印刷機は、オペレーターが自分で表示部に表示する映像を切り替えなくても、表示部に表示する映像を自動で強調して表示する。これにより、本発明に係る印刷機本体モニター装置及び印刷機制御装置ならびに印刷機は、従来、オペレーターが表示部に表示されている映像を手動で切り替えていた手間を低減できる。 With the above configuration, the printing press main body monitoring device, the printing press control device, and the printing press according to the present invention automatically emphasize the video displayed on the display unit without the operator switching the video displayed on the display unit by himself. To display. As a result, the printing press main body monitoring device, the printing press control device, and the printing press according to the present invention can reduce the trouble that the operator has manually switched the video displayed on the display unit.
 本発明の好ましい態様としては、複数の前記カメラのうちの少なくとも1つは、前記印刷機本体の給紙部に設けられて前記給紙部を撮像し、前記各種信号の一つであって、新しい印刷ジョブを開始するための印刷開始信号が入力されると、前記給紙部から前記印刷機本体の印刷部に前記被記録媒体が供給され始めるよりも前に、前記給紙部の映像を他の映像よりも強調して前記表示部に表示することが望ましい。 As a preferred aspect of the present invention, at least one of the plurality of cameras is provided in a paper feeding unit of the printing machine main body, images the paper feeding unit, and is one of the various signals, When a print start signal for starting a new print job is input, the image of the paper feed unit is displayed before the recording medium starts to be supplied from the paper feed unit to the printing unit of the printer main body. It is desirable to display on the display unit with emphasis over other images.
 ここで仮に、前回の印刷時に、給紙部に不連続で被記録媒体が残っている状態で印刷が開始されると、印刷機本体は、停止して不具合発生モードとなる場合がある。仮に印刷機本体が不具合発生モードとなると、オペレーターは、印刷機本体の内部に残っていた被記録媒体を排出する作業や、印刷機本体の不具合発生モードを解除する作業を実行する必要がある。 Here, if the printing is started with the recording medium remaining discontinuously in the paper feeding unit at the time of the previous printing, the printing machine main body may stop and enter a failure occurrence mode. If the printing press main body is in the failure occurrence mode, the operator needs to perform an operation of discharging the recording medium remaining inside the printing press main body or an operation of canceling the failure occurrence mode of the printing press main body.
 しかしながら、上記構成により、本発明に係る印刷機本体モニター装置は、給紙部から印刷部に被記録媒体が供給され始めるよりも前に、オペレーターに給紙部の映像を確認させることができる。これにより、オペレーターは、給紙部から印刷部に被記録媒体が供給され始めるよりも前に、給紙部に被記録媒体が残っているか否かを確認できる。 However, with the above-described configuration, the printing machine main body monitoring apparatus according to the present invention can allow the operator to check the image of the paper feeding unit before the recording medium starts to be supplied from the paper feeding unit to the printing unit. Thus, the operator can confirm whether or not the recording medium remains in the paper feeding unit before the recording medium starts to be supplied from the paper feeding unit to the printing unit.
 よって、本発明に係る印刷機本体モニター装置は、前回の印刷時に、給紙部に不連続で被記録媒体が残っている状態で印刷が開始されるおそれを抑制できる。これにより、本発明に係る印刷機本体モニター装置は、印刷機本体の内部に残っていた被記録媒体を排出する作業や、印刷機本体の不具合発生モードを解除する作業に要するオペレーターの手間を低減できる。 Therefore, the printing press main body monitoring apparatus according to the present invention can suppress the possibility that printing is started in a state where the recording medium is discontinuously left in the paper feeding unit during the previous printing. As a result, the printing press main body monitoring device according to the present invention reduces the labor of the operator required to discharge the recording medium remaining inside the printing press main body and to release the malfunction occurrence mode of the printing press main body. it can.
 本発明の好ましい態様としては、前記印刷機本体の運転中に、前記各種信号の一つであって、前記給紙部に不具合が生じたことを判断するための給紙部不具合発生信号が入力されると、前記給紙部を撮像する前記カメラから取得した映像を他の映像よりも強調して前記表示部に表示することが望ましい。 As a preferred aspect of the present invention, during operation of the printing press main body, one of the various signals and a paper feed unit failure occurrence signal for determining that a failure has occurred in the paper feed unit is input. Then, it is desirable that the video acquired from the camera that captures the paper feeding unit is displayed on the display unit with emphasis over other video.
 ここで、印刷機本体の各部位の中で、最も不具合の発生を予測しておくべき部位は、給紙部である。本発明に係る印刷機本体モニター装置は、給紙部で不具合が発生した場合には、自動で給紙部の映像を表示部に表示する。これにより、オペレーターは、迅速に給紙部で不具合が発生したことを把握できると共に、映像を選択する操作をすることなく不具合が発生した給紙部の映像を確認できる。 Here, among the parts of the printing press main body, the part that should be predicted to have the most trouble is the paper feeding unit. The printer main body monitor apparatus according to the present invention automatically displays an image of the paper feeding unit on the display unit when a problem occurs in the paper feeding unit. As a result, the operator can quickly grasp that a failure has occurred in the sheet feeding unit, and can check the image of the sheet feeding unit in which the failure has occurred without performing an operation of selecting an image.
 本発明の好ましい態様としては、前記印刷機本体の運転中に、前記各種信号の一つであって、前記印刷機本体に不具合が生じたことを判断するための前記信号である不具合発生信号が入力されると、前記印刷機本体の部位のうち前記不具合が生じた部位に前記カメラが設けられている場合は、前記不具合が生じた部位を撮像する前記カメラから取得した映像を他の映像よりも強調して前記表示部に表示することが望ましい。 As a preferred aspect of the present invention, during the operation of the printing press main body, there is a failure occurrence signal that is one of the various signals and is the signal for determining that a failure has occurred in the printing press main body. When input, if the camera is provided in a part where the defect occurs in the part of the printing machine main body, an image acquired from the camera that images the part where the defect occurs is compared to other images. It is also desirable to emphasize and display on the display unit.
 上記構成により、本発明に係る印刷機本体モニター装置は、印刷機本体の運転中に不具合が発生した場合、不具合が発生した部位の映像を強調して表示部に自動で表示する。これにより、本発明に係る印刷機本体モニター装置は、オペレーターが表示部に表示されている映像を手動で切り替える手間を低減できる。 With the above configuration, when a malfunction occurs during the operation of the printing press body, the printing press main body monitoring apparatus according to the present invention automatically highlights the image of the site where the malfunction has occurred and displays it on the display unit. Thereby, the printing press main body monitor apparatus according to the present invention can reduce the trouble of manually switching the video displayed on the display unit by the operator.
 また、不具合が生じた部位の映像が自動で表示部に表示されるため、オペレーターは、印刷機本体のどこの部分で不具合が生じたかを調べることなく、不具合が生じた部位を把握できる。さらに、オペレーターは、印刷機本体モニター装置から離れることなく、不具合が生じた部位の映像を確認できる。以上により、本発明に係る印刷機本体モニター装置は、オペレーターの手間を低減できる。 Also, since the image of the part where the problem has occurred is automatically displayed on the display unit, the operator can grasp the part where the problem has occurred without examining where in the main body of the printer the problem has occurred. Furthermore, the operator can check the image of the part where the problem has occurred without leaving the printing press main body monitor device. As described above, the printing press main body monitoring device according to the present invention can reduce the labor of the operator.
 本発明の好ましい態様としては、複数の前記カメラのうちの少なくとも1つは、前記被記録媒体の被記録面を反転させる反転部に設けられて前記反転部を撮像し、前記印刷機本体の運転中に、前記各種信号の一つであって、前記反転部に不具合が生じたことを判断するための反転部不具合発生信号が入力されると、前記反転部を撮像する前記カメラから取得した映像を他の映像よりも強調して前記表示部に表示することが望ましい。 As a preferred aspect of the present invention, at least one of the plurality of cameras is provided in a reversing unit that reverses a recording surface of the recording medium, images the reversing unit, and operates the printer main body. When an inversion unit failure occurrence signal is input that is one of the various signals and is used to determine that a failure has occurred in the inversion unit, an image acquired from the camera that images the inversion unit It is desirable to display on the display unit with emphasis over other images.
 上記構成により、本発明に係る印刷機本体モニター装置は、反転部で不具合が発生した場合には、自動で反転部の映像を表示部に表示する。これにより、オペレーターは、迅速に反転部で不具合が発生したことを把握できると共に、映像を選択する操作をすることなく不具合が発生した反転部の映像を確認できる。 With the above configuration, the printing press main body monitor device according to the present invention automatically displays the video of the reversing unit on the display unit when a problem occurs in the reversing unit. As a result, the operator can quickly grasp that a problem has occurred in the reversing unit, and can check the video of the reversing unit in which the problem has occurred without performing an operation of selecting an image.
 本発明の好ましい態様としては、複数の前記カメラのうちの少なくとも1つは、前記被記録媒体を排出する排紙部に設けられて前記排紙部を撮像し、前記印刷機本体の運転中に、前記各種信号の一つであって、前記排紙部に不具合が生じたことを判断するための排紙部不具合発生信号が入力されると、前記排紙部を撮像する前記カメラから取得した映像を他の映像よりも強調して前記表示部に表示することが望ましい。 In a preferred aspect of the present invention, at least one of the plurality of cameras is provided in a paper discharge unit that discharges the recording medium, images the paper discharge unit, and the printer main body is in operation. When a paper discharge unit failure occurrence signal for determining that a failure has occurred in the paper discharge unit is input as one of the various signals, the signal is acquired from the camera that images the paper discharge unit. It is desirable to display an image on the display unit with emphasis over other images.
 上記構成により、本発明に係る印刷機本体モニター装置は、排紙部で不具合が発生した場合には、自動で排紙部の映像を表示部に表示する。これにより、オペレーターは、迅速に排紙部で不具合が発生したことを把握できると共に、映像を選択する操作をすることなく不具合が発生した排紙部の映像を確認できる。 With the above configuration, the printing press main body monitor apparatus according to the present invention automatically displays the image of the paper discharge unit on the display unit when a problem occurs in the paper discharge unit. Thus, the operator can quickly grasp that a failure has occurred in the paper discharge unit, and can check the video of the paper discharge unit in which the failure has occurred without performing an operation of selecting an image.
 本発明の好ましい態様としては、前記各種信号に対応した映像を、前記他の映像よりも拡大して前記表示部に表示することで、前記各種信号に対応した映像を、前記他の映像よりも強調することが望ましい。 As a preferable aspect of the present invention, an image corresponding to the various signals is displayed on the display unit in an enlarged manner than the other images, so that the images corresponding to the various signals are displayed more than the other images. It is desirable to emphasize.
 映像は、表示域の面積が大きいほど、他の映像よりも強調される傾向にある。よって、本発明に係る印刷機本体モニター装置は、前記各種信号に対応した映像を、前記他の映像よりも強調できる。 The image tends to be emphasized more than other images as the area of the display area is larger. Therefore, the printing press main body monitor apparatus according to the present invention can emphasize the video corresponding to the various signals more than the other video.
 本発明の好ましい態様としては、前記各種信号に対応した映像のみを前記表示部の表示域全体に拡大して表示することで、前記各種信号に対応した映像を、前記他の映像よりも強調することが望ましい。 As a preferred aspect of the present invention, only the video corresponding to the various signals is displayed in an enlarged manner in the entire display area of the display unit, so that the video corresponding to the various signals is emphasized more than the other video. It is desirable.
 一つの画面に強調すべき映像のみを表示することで、前記映像は他の映像よりもより強調される。よって、本発明に係る印刷機本体モニター装置は、前記各種信号に対応した映像を、前記他の映像よりも強調できる。 By displaying only the video to be emphasized on one screen, the video is more emphasized than the other video. Therefore, the printing press main body monitor apparatus according to the present invention can emphasize the video corresponding to the various signals more than the other video.
 本発明の好ましい態様としては、情報を記憶する記憶手段を備え、前記カメラが撮像した映像のうちの少なくとも一部を記憶手段に格納することが望ましい。 As a preferred aspect of the present invention, it is desirable to provide storage means for storing information, and to store at least a part of the video captured by the camera in the storage means.
 上記構成により、本発明に係る印刷機本体モニター装置は、印刷が終わった後であっても、印刷機本体の各部の映像を確認できる。 With the above configuration, the printing press main body monitoring apparatus according to the present invention can check the video of each part of the printing press main body even after printing is finished.
 本発明の好ましい態様としては、前記カメラが撮像した映像のうちの少なくとも一部を、前記印刷機制御装置が接続される通信回線を介して前記印刷機本体モニター装置の外部に提供することが望ましい。 As a preferred aspect of the present invention, it is desirable to provide at least a part of an image captured by the camera to the outside of the printing press main body monitoring device via a communication line to which the printing press control device is connected. .
 上記構成により、本発明に係る印刷機本体モニター装置を用いれば、印刷機が設けられている設備から離れた場所に配置される映像表示装置、例えば、パーソナルコンピュータからも、印刷機本体の各部の様子を確認できる。 With the above configuration, if the printing press main body monitoring device according to the present invention is used, a video display device disposed at a location away from the equipment in which the printing press is provided, for example, a personal computer, each part of the printing press main body. You can check the situation.
 本発明は、オペレーターの作業量を低減できる。 The present invention can reduce the amount of operator work.
図1は、印刷機の全体を示す外観図である。FIG. 1 is an external view showing the entire printing press. 図2は、紙送り装置を胴群の回転軸に直交する平面で切って示す断面図である。FIG. 2 is a cross-sectional view showing the paper feeding device cut along a plane perpendicular to the rotation axis of the cylinder group. 図3は、基準画面が表示されているときの表示部を模式的に示す構成図である。FIG. 3 is a configuration diagram schematically showing the display unit when the reference screen is displayed. 図4は、設定項目リストが表示されているときの表示部を模式的に示す構成図である。FIG. 4 is a configuration diagram schematically showing the display unit when the setting item list is displayed. 図5は、実施形態1の設定画面が表示されているときの表示部を模式的に示す構成図である。FIG. 5 is a configuration diagram schematically illustrating a display unit when the setting screen of the first embodiment is displayed. 図6は、制御装置を模式的に示す構成図である。FIG. 6 is a configuration diagram schematically showing the control device. 図7は、追跡画面が表示されているときの表示部を模式的に示す構成図である。FIG. 7 is a configuration diagram schematically showing the display unit when the tracking screen is displayed. 図8は、拡大表示用追跡画面が表示されているときの表示部を模式的に示す構成図である。FIG. 8 is a configuration diagram schematically showing the display unit when the enlarged display tracking screen is displayed. 図9は、実施形態2の設定画面が表示されているときの表示部を模式的に示す構成図である。FIG. 9 is a configuration diagram schematically illustrating a display unit when the setting screen of the second embodiment is displayed. 図10は、実施形態2の設定画面に備考表示部が表示されているときの表示部を模式的に示す構成図である。FIG. 10 is a configuration diagram schematically illustrating the display unit when the remark display unit is displayed on the setting screen of the second embodiment. 図11は、比較設定画面が表示されているときの表示部を模式的に示す構成図である。FIG. 11 is a configuration diagram schematically showing the display unit when the comparison setting screen is displayed. 図12は、カメラ制御画面が表示されているときの表示部を模式的に示す構成図である。FIG. 12 is a configuration diagram schematically showing the display unit when the camera control screen is displayed. 図13は、4画面表示時の表示部を模式的に示す構成図である。FIG. 13 is a configuration diagram schematically showing a display unit during four-screen display. 図14は、1画面表示時の表示部を模式的に示す構成図である。FIG. 14 is a configuration diagram schematically showing a display unit during one-screen display. 図15は、ポップアップ表示時の表示部を模式的に示す構成図である。FIG. 15 is a configuration diagram schematically showing a display unit during pop-up display. 図16は、強調枠が表示されている際の表示部を模式的に示す構成図である。FIG. 16 is a configuration diagram schematically illustrating a display unit when an emphasis frame is displayed.
 以下に、本発明に係る設定入力補助装置及び印刷機本体モニター装置ならびに印刷機の実施形態を図面に基づいて詳細に説明する。なお、この実施形態によりこの発明が限定されるものではない。 Hereinafter, embodiments of a setting input auxiliary device, a printing press main body monitoring device, and a printing press according to the present invention will be described in detail with reference to the drawings. In addition, this invention is not limited by this embodiment.
(実施形態1)
 図1は、印刷機の全体を示す外観図である。印刷機1は、印刷機本体900と、印刷機制御装置200とを含んで構成される。本実施形態では、印刷機本体900は、一例として枚葉印刷機であるものとして説明する。印刷機本体900は、給紙部910と、印刷部930と、反転部950と、排紙部960とを含んで構成される。
(Embodiment 1)
FIG. 1 is an external view showing the entire printing press. The printing press 1 includes a printing press main body 900 and a printing press control apparatus 200. In the present embodiment, the printing press main body 900 will be described as an example of a sheet-fed printing press. The printing machine main body 900 includes a paper feeding unit 910, a printing unit 930, a reversing unit 950, and a paper discharge unit 960.
 給紙部910は、紙積装置911と、紙送り装置920とを含んで構成される。紙積装置911は、印刷が施される被記録媒体としての紙Sが積み重ねられる。なお、被記録媒体には、紙S以外に、例えば、フィルムや表面にアルミでコーティングされているシートなども含まれる。紙送り装置920は、紙積装置911から導かれた紙Sを印刷部930に導く。印刷部930は、紙Sに印刷を施す。印刷部930で印刷が施された紙Sは、排紙部960に排出される。 The paper feeding unit 910 includes a paper stacking device 911 and a paper feeding device 920. The paper stacking device 911 stacks paper S as recording media on which printing is performed. In addition to the paper S, the recording medium includes, for example, a film and a sheet whose surface is coated with aluminum. The paper feeding device 920 guides the paper S guided from the paper stacking device 911 to the printing unit 930. The printing unit 930 performs printing on the paper S. The paper S printed by the printing unit 930 is discharged to the paper discharge unit 960.
 印刷部930は、給紙部910から排紙部960に向かって順に、第1印刷ユニット931と、第2印刷ユニット932と、第3印刷ユニット933と、第4印刷ユニット934とが並んで配置されて構成される。第1印刷ユニット931から第4印刷ユニット934の各印刷ユニットは、例えば、シアン、マゼンタ、イエロー、ブラック等の単色を重ねて印刷する。 In the printing unit 930, a first printing unit 931, a second printing unit 932, a third printing unit 933, and a fourth printing unit 934 are arranged in order from the paper feeding unit 910 toward the paper discharge unit 960. Configured. Each printing unit from the first printing unit 931 to the fourth printing unit 934 prints, for example, a single color such as cyan, magenta, yellow, and black in an overlapping manner.
 印刷部930は、印刷ユニット毎に、胴群940を有する。胴群940には、例えば、中間胴941と、版胴942と、ブランケット胴943と、圧胴944とが含まれる。胴群940は、円筒形状に形成され、各胴がそれぞれの中心軸を軸に回転できるように、フレームに設けられる。なお、本実施形態では、第3印刷ユニット933には、中間胴941は含まれない。 The printing unit 930 has a cylinder group 940 for each printing unit. The cylinder group 940 includes, for example, an intermediate cylinder 941, a plate cylinder 942, a blanket cylinder 943, and an impression cylinder 944. The body group 940 is formed in a cylindrical shape, and is provided on the frame so that each body can rotate about its center axis. In the present embodiment, the third printing unit 933 does not include the intermediate cylinder 941.
 図2は、紙送り装置を胴群の回転軸に直交する平面で切って示す断面図である。紙送り装置920は、図1に示す印刷機本体900の紙積装置911と印刷部930との間に配置される。紙送り装置920は、図2に示すように、案内板921と、前当て922と、紙押さえ部材923と、スインググリッパー924と、紙送り装置用空気噴出装置170とを含んで構成される。 FIG. 2 is a cross-sectional view showing the paper feeding device cut along a plane orthogonal to the rotation axis of the cylinder group. The paper feeding device 920 is disposed between the paper stacking device 911 and the printing unit 930 of the printer main body 900 shown in FIG. As shown in FIG. 2, the paper feeding device 920 includes a guide plate 921, a front pad 922, a paper pressing member 923, a swing gripper 924, and a paper feeding device air ejection device 170.
 案内板921は、給紙部910から印刷部930に向かう紙Sの走行方向に沿って設けられる。案内板921は、印刷部930側の端部が第1印刷ユニット931の中間胴941の側周部に対向して配置される。 The guide plate 921 is provided along the traveling direction of the paper S from the paper supply unit 910 toward the printing unit 930. The guide plate 921 is disposed so that the end on the printing unit 930 side faces the side peripheral portion of the intermediate cylinder 941 of the first printing unit 931.
 前当て922は、案内板921の端部と中間胴941の側周部との間に設けられる。前当て922は、案内板921の面のうち、紙Sが走行する方の面から突出して設けられる。案内板921の面のうち、紙Sが走行する方の面を案内板921の走行面という。紙Sは、案内板921上を走行し、咥え側Stが前当て922に当たると咥え側Stの位置が整えられる。 The front pad 922 is provided between the end of the guide plate 921 and the side periphery of the intermediate body 941. The front pad 922 is provided so as to protrude from the surface of the guide plate 921 on which the paper S travels. Of the surfaces of the guide plate 921, the surface on which the paper S travels is referred to as the travel surface of the guide plate 921. The paper S travels on the guide plate 921, and the position of the gripping side St is adjusted when the gripping side St hits the front contact 922.
 紙押さえ部材923は、案内板921の走行面と対向する位置に設けられる。紙押さえ部材923は、例えば、案内板921に近づくほど、前当て922に向かって湾曲する板状の部材である。また、紙押さえ部材923は、紙Sの種類によっては、中間胴941の回転軸と平行な軸を回転軸とするローラーの場合もある。 The paper pressing member 923 is provided at a position facing the traveling surface of the guide plate 921. The paper pressing member 923 is, for example, a plate-like member that curves toward the front pad 922 as the guide plate 921 is approached. Further, depending on the type of the paper S, the paper pressing member 923 may be a roller having an axis parallel to the rotation axis of the intermediate cylinder 941 as a rotation axis.
 紙押さえ部材923と案内板921との間には、隙間が形成され、紙Sはこの隙間を通って案内板921上を中間胴941に向かって走行する。この時、紙押さえ部材923は、前記隙間を通過する紙Sと接触することによって、前記紙Sを案内板921側にガイドする。これにより、紙押さえ部材923は、紙Sが案内板921から浮き上がるおそれを抑制する。 A gap is formed between the paper pressing member 923 and the guide plate 921, and the paper S travels on the guide plate 921 toward the intermediate drum 941 through this gap. At this time, the paper pressing member 923 guides the paper S toward the guide plate 921 by contacting the paper S passing through the gap. Thereby, the paper pressing member 923 suppresses the possibility that the paper S is lifted from the guide plate 921.
 ここで、前記隙間の大きさは、前記隙間を通過する紙Sの厚みによって調節される。紙押さえ部材923は、案内板921に近づく方向、及び、案内板921から遠ざかる方向に紙押さえ部材923を移動させる昇降装置923aに取り付けられる。 Here, the size of the gap is adjusted by the thickness of the paper S passing through the gap. The paper pressing member 923 is attached to an elevating device 923 a that moves the paper pressing member 923 in a direction approaching the guide plate 921 and in a direction away from the guide plate 921.
 これにより、案内板921と紙押さえ部材923との間の隙間の大きさは、昇降装置923aによって調節される。具体的には、紙Sの厚みが厚くなるほど、前記隙間の大きさは大きく設定される。なお、紙Sの厚みとは、案内板921と紙押さえ部材923とを結ぶ方向の紙Sの寸法である。 Thereby, the size of the gap between the guide plate 921 and the paper pressing member 923 is adjusted by the lifting device 923a. Specifically, the larger the thickness of the paper S, the larger the size of the gap. The thickness of the paper S is the dimension of the paper S in the direction connecting the guide plate 921 and the paper pressing member 923.
 スインググリッパー924は、案内板921及び前当て922と、第1印刷ユニット931の中間胴941との間に配置される。スインググリッパー924は、前当て922によって位置決めされた紙Sを掴む。スインググリッパー924は、胴群940のそれぞれの回転軸と平行な回動軸924aを軸に回動することにより、グリッパー側爪924bが、案内板921の端部から中間胴941側に近づく方向に動いて、紙Sを中間胴941に受け渡す。 The swing gripper 924 is disposed between the guide plate 921 and the front pad 922 and the intermediate cylinder 941 of the first printing unit 931. The swing gripper 924 grips the paper S positioned by the front pad 922. The swing gripper 924 rotates about a rotation shaft 924a parallel to the respective rotation shafts of the body group 940, so that the gripper side claw 924b approaches the intermediate body 941 side from the end of the guide plate 921. It moves to deliver the paper S to the intermediate cylinder 941.
 このようにして、紙送り装置920は、図1に示す給紙部910から導かれた紙Sの咥え側Stを、スインググリッパー924が中間胴941に導く。これにより、紙送り装置920は、紙Sを給紙部910から印刷部930に送る。 In this way, in the paper feeding device 920, the swing gripper 924 guides the grip side St of the paper S guided from the paper feeding unit 910 shown in FIG. Accordingly, the paper feeding device 920 sends the paper S from the paper feeding unit 910 to the printing unit 930.
 紙送り装置用空気噴出装置170は、案内板921の走行面に開口する噴出口171から紙Sの走行方向に向かって、案内板921と紙Sとの間に、案内板921に沿って空気を噴出する。 The air ejecting device 170 for the paper feeding device is arranged along the guide plate 921 between the guide plate 921 and the paper S in the running direction of the paper S from the jet port 171 opening in the running surface of the guide plate 921. Erupt.
 これにより、案内板921と紙Sとの間の気圧が、紙Sを境に案内板921と反対側の気圧よりも低下する。よって、紙Sは、案内板921側に引き寄せられる。このようにして、紙送り装置用空気噴出装置170は、案内板921上を走行する紙Sを案内板921側に吸い付けて、紙Sが案内板921から浮き上がるおそれを抑制する。 Thereby, the air pressure between the guide plate 921 and the paper S is lower than the air pressure on the opposite side of the guide plate 921 with the paper S as a boundary. Therefore, the paper S is drawn toward the guide plate 921 side. In this way, the paper jetting device air jet device 170 sucks the paper S traveling on the guide plate 921 toward the guide plate 921, and suppresses the possibility that the paper S is lifted from the guide plate 921.
 図1に示す反転部950は、第2印刷ユニット932と第3印刷ユニット933との間に配置される。具体的には、反転部950は、第2印刷ユニット932の圧胴944と、第3印刷ユニット933の圧胴944との間に配置される。 1 is arranged between the second printing unit 932 and the third printing unit 933. The reversing unit 950 shown in FIG. Specifically, the reversing unit 950 is disposed between the impression cylinder 944 of the second printing unit 932 and the impression cylinder 944 of the third printing unit 933.
 排紙部960は、給紙部910から排紙部960に向かって走行する紙Sの走行方向の順に、反転中間胴951と、反転倍胴952と、反転胴953とを含んで構成される。反転中間胴951と、反転倍胴952と、反転胴953とは、それぞれ円筒形状に形成され、各胴がそれぞれの中心軸を軸に回転できるように、フレームに設けられる。 The paper discharge unit 960 includes a reverse intermediate cylinder 951, a reverse double cylinder 952, and a reverse cylinder 953 in order of the traveling direction of the paper S that travels from the paper supply unit 910 toward the paper discharge unit 960. . The inversion intermediate cylinder 951, the inversion double cylinder 952, and the inversion cylinder 953 are each formed in a cylindrical shape, and are provided on the frame so that each cylinder can rotate about its central axis.
 反転部950は、紙Sの端部のうち、反転中間胴951及び反転倍胴952で咥えられる側の端部である咥え側Stとは反対側の端部である咥え尻側Sbを反転胴953が咥える。反転部950は、紙Sの端部のうち第1印刷ユニット931及び第2印刷ユニット932での咥え尻側Sbを、新たな咥え側Stとして反転胴953が第3印刷ユニット933の圧胴944に受け渡す。 The reversing part 950 is a tail edge side Sb that is an end part on the opposite side to the tail side St that is the end part of the paper S that is supported by the reversing intermediate cylinder 951 and the reversing double cylinder 952. The reversing drum 953 holds. The reversing unit 950 uses the tail edge side Sb of the first printing unit 931 and the second printing unit 932 in the end portion of the paper S as a new gripping side St, and the reversing cylinder 953 presses the pressure of the third printing unit 933. Pass to the barrel 944.
 また、反転部950は、紙Sの2つの面のうち、第2印刷ユニット932の圧胴944でブランケット胴943と接触する側の面を、圧胴944の側周部と接触する側に変更して紙Sを第3印刷ユニット933の圧胴944に受け渡す。このようにして、反転部950は、第2印刷ユニット932と第3印刷ユニット933との間で、紙Sの面のうち、印刷が施される側の面である被記録面を反転させる。 In addition, the reversing unit 950 changes the surface of the two surfaces of the paper S that contacts the blanket cylinder 943 at the impression cylinder 944 of the second printing unit 932 to the side that contacts the side periphery of the impression cylinder 944. Then, the paper S is delivered to the impression cylinder 944 of the third printing unit 933. In this way, the reversing unit 950 reverses the recording surface, which is the surface on which printing is performed, among the surfaces of the paper S between the second printing unit 932 and the third printing unit 933.
 反転部950は、反転部用空気噴出装置180を含んで構成される。ここで、印刷機本体900には、各胴がオペレーターに露出しないように、カバー901に覆われて設けられている。反転部用空気噴出装置180は、各胴と対向する位置のうち、カバー901が設けられている側とは反対側のいわゆる裏側に配置される。 The reversing unit 950 includes a reversing unit air ejection device 180. Here, the printer main body 900 is provided with a cover 901 so that each cylinder is not exposed to the operator. The reversing part air ejecting device 180 is arranged on a so-called back side opposite to the side where the cover 901 is provided, in a position facing each cylinder.
 反転部用空気噴出装置180は、例えば、反転部用第1空気噴出装置181と、反転部用第2空気噴出装置182と、反転部用第3空気噴出装置183と、反転部用第4空気噴出装置184とを含んで構成される。なお、反転部用空気噴出装置180が備える空気噴出装置の数は4つに限定されない。 The reversing part air ejecting device 180 includes, for example, a reversing part first air ejecting apparatus 181, a reversing part second air ejecting apparatus 182, a reversing part third air ejecting apparatus 183, and a reversing part fourth air. And a jetting device 184. Note that the number of air ejection devices provided in the reversing unit air ejection device 180 is not limited to four.
 反転部用空気噴出装置180は、反転部用第1空気噴出装置181から反転部用第4空気噴出装置184の各空気噴出装置が反転部950の各胴の側周部に対向して設けられて、反転部950の各胴の側周部に向かって空気を噴出する。これにより、反転部用空気噴出装置180は、反転部950の各胴の側周部に巻き付いて搬送される紙Sを、反転部950の各胴の側周部に押し付ける。このようにして、反転部用空気噴出装置180は、紙Sのばたつきを抑制する。 In the reversing part air ejecting device 180, each air ejecting apparatus from the reversing part first air ejecting apparatus 181 to the reversing part fourth air ejecting apparatus 184 is provided to face the side peripheral part of each trunk of the reversing part 950. Then, air is ejected toward the side periphery of each cylinder of the reversing unit 950. As a result, the reversing part air ejection device 180 presses the paper S that is wound around and conveyed on the side peripheral part of each cylinder of the reversing part 950 against the side peripheral part of each cylinder of the reversing part 950. In this way, the reversing part air ejection device 180 suppresses the flapping of the paper S.
 反転部950で被記録面が反転された紙Sは、第3印刷ユニット933及び第4印刷ユニット934で印刷が施されて、排紙部960に排出される。このようにして、印刷機本体900は、紙Sの両面に印刷を施す。 The paper S whose recording surface is reversed by the reversing unit 950 is printed by the third printing unit 933 and the fourth printing unit 934 and is discharged to the paper discharge unit 960. In this way, the printer main body 900 performs printing on both sides of the paper S.
 排紙部960は、排紙台961と、チェーン962と、排紙胴963と、従動軸964と、グリッパー965と、チャンバーガイド966と、排紙部用空気噴出装置190とを含んで構成される。排紙台961は、印刷部930で印刷が施された紙Sが積載される台である。 The paper discharge unit 960 includes a paper discharge table 961, a chain 962, a paper discharge drum 963, a driven shaft 964, a gripper 965, a chamber guide 966, and a paper discharge unit air ejection device 190. The The paper discharge table 961 is a table on which the paper S printed by the printing unit 930 is stacked.
 チェーン962は、印刷部930側に配置される排紙胴963と、排紙台961側に配置される従動軸964とに巻き掛けられる。排紙胴963及び従動軸964は、胴群940の各胴の回転軸と平行な軸を回転軸として回転する。 The chain 962 is wound around a paper discharge drum 963 arranged on the printing unit 930 side and a driven shaft 964 arranged on the paper discharge table 961 side. The paper discharge cylinder 963 and the driven shaft 964 rotate with an axis parallel to the rotation axis of each cylinder of the cylinder group 940 as a rotation axis.
 グリッパー965は、チェーン962に取り付けられる。グリッパー965は、紙Sの一部を掴む。排紙部960は、グリッパー965が紙Sの一部を掴んだ状態で、排紙胴963及び従動軸964が回転することで、チェーン962が紙Sを排紙台961に向かって搬送する。 The gripper 965 is attached to the chain 962. The gripper 965 grips a part of the paper S. With the gripper 965 grasping a part of the paper S, the paper discharge drum 963 and the driven shaft 964 rotate so that the chain 962 conveys the paper S toward the paper discharge table 961.
 チャンバーガイド966は、チェーン962と対向して設けられる。チャンバーガイド966は、グリッパー965が紙Sの一部を掴んで排紙台961に向かう搬送ラインに沿って設けられる。チャンバーガイド966は、グリッパー965によって掴まれて搬送される紙Sを案内する。 The chamber guide 966 is provided to face the chain 962. The chamber guide 966 is provided along a conveyance line in which the gripper 965 grips a part of the paper S and heads toward the paper discharge table 961. The chamber guide 966 guides the paper S that is gripped and conveyed by the gripper 965.
 排紙部用空気噴出装置190は、例えば、排紙部用第1空気噴出装置191と、排紙部用第2空気噴出装置192とを含んで構成される。排紙部用第1空気噴出装置191は、チャンバーガイド966に設けられる。排紙部用第1空気噴出装置191は、チャンバーガイド966から遠ざかる方向に、紙Sに向かって空気を噴出する。 The paper ejection unit air ejection device 190 includes, for example, a paper ejection unit first air ejection device 191 and a paper ejection unit second air ejection device 192. The first air ejection device 191 for the paper discharge unit is provided in the chamber guide 966. The first air ejection device 191 for the paper discharge unit ejects air toward the paper S in a direction away from the chamber guide 966.
 これにより、排紙部用第1空気噴出装置191は、グリッパー965によって掴まれて搬送される紙Sとチャンバーガイド966との間に隙間を確保する。このようにして、排紙部用第1空気噴出装置191は、印刷部930で印刷が施された紙Sがチャンバーガイド966と接触して擦れるおそれを抑制する。 Thereby, the first air ejection device 191 for the paper discharge unit secures a gap between the paper S that is gripped and conveyed by the gripper 965 and the chamber guide 966. In this way, the first air ejection device 191 for the paper discharge unit suppresses the possibility that the paper S printed by the printing unit 930 comes into contact with the chamber guide 966 and is rubbed.
 排紙部用第2空気噴出装置192は、排紙台961と対向して設けられる。具体的には、排紙部用第2空気噴出装置192は、グリッパー965によって掴まれて搬送される紙Sを境に、排紙部960と反対側に設けられる。排紙部用第2空気噴出装置192は、排紙台961に向かって空気を噴出する。 The second air ejection device 192 for the paper discharge unit is provided to face the paper discharge table 961. Specifically, the second air ejection device 192 for the paper discharge unit is provided on the opposite side of the paper discharge unit 960 with the paper S being gripped and conveyed by the gripper 965 as a boundary. The second air ejection device 192 for the paper ejection unit ejects air toward the paper ejection table 961.
 これにより、排紙部用第2空気噴出装置192は、グリッパー965によって掴まれて搬送される紙Sに、排紙台961に向かう風を当てる。このようにして、グリッパー965によって掴まれて搬送される紙Sを排紙台961に案内する。 Thereby, the second air ejection device 192 for the paper discharge unit applies the wind toward the paper discharge table 961 to the paper S that is gripped and conveyed by the gripper 965. In this way, the paper S that is gripped and conveyed by the gripper 965 is guided to the paper discharge table 961.
 印刷機制御装置200は、コンピューターを含んで構成されて印刷機本体900の各部を制御する。印刷機制御装置200は、例えば、給紙部910と、印刷部930と、反転部950と、排紙部960と電気的に接続される。印刷機制御装置200は、これにより、印刷機本体900の各部を制御する。 The printing press control apparatus 200 includes a computer and controls each part of the printing press main body 900. The printing press control apparatus 200 is electrically connected to, for example, a paper feed unit 910, a printing unit 930, a reversing unit 950, and a paper discharge unit 960. Thus, the printing press control apparatus 200 controls each part of the printing press main body 900.
 具体的には、印刷機制御装置200は、図2に示す紙送り装置920の昇降装置923aと電気的に接続される。これにより、印刷機制御装置200は、図2に示す紙押さえ部材923と案内板921との間の隙間の大きさを調節する。また、印刷機制御装置200は、紙送り装置用空気噴出装置170と電気的に接続される。これにより、印刷機制御装置200は、紙送り装置用空気噴出装置170が噴出する空気の流量を調節する。 Specifically, the printing press control device 200 is electrically connected to the lifting device 923a of the paper feeding device 920 shown in FIG. Accordingly, the printing press control apparatus 200 adjusts the size of the gap between the paper pressing member 923 and the guide plate 921 shown in FIG. Further, the printing press control apparatus 200 is electrically connected to the paper feeding apparatus air ejection apparatus 170. Thereby, the printing press control apparatus 200 adjusts the flow rate of the air ejected by the paper ejecting apparatus air ejecting apparatus 170.
 また、印刷機制御装置200は、図1に示す反転部用空気噴出装置180と電気的に接続される。これにより、印刷機制御装置200は、反転部用空気噴出装置180の各空気噴出装置が噴出する空気の流量を調節する。また、印刷機制御装置200は、排紙部用空気噴出装置190と電気的に接続される。これにより、印刷機制御装置200は、排紙部用空気噴出装置190の各空気噴出装置が噴出する空気の流量を調節する。 Further, the printing press control apparatus 200 is electrically connected to the reversing part air ejecting apparatus 180 shown in FIG. Thereby, the printing press control apparatus 200 adjusts the flow rate of the air ejected by each air ejecting apparatus of the reversing unit air ejecting apparatus 180. Further, the printing press control apparatus 200 is electrically connected to the paper discharge unit air ejection apparatus 190. Accordingly, the printing press control apparatus 200 adjusts the flow rate of the air ejected by each air ejection device of the paper ejection unit air ejection device 190.
 印刷機制御装置200は、設定入力補助装置100を含んで構成される。なお、本実施形態では、設定入力補助装置100は、印刷機制御装置200の一部として印刷機制御装置200に組み込まれて構成される。つまり、設定入力補助装置100が備える構成は、印刷機制御装置200が備えている構成でもあり、設定入力補助装置100が実行する手順は、印刷機制御装置200が実行する手順でもある。なお、設定入力補助装置100は、印刷機制御装置200に組み込まれずに、印刷機制御装置200とは別個に設けられる構成であってもよい。 The printing press control device 200 is configured to include a setting input auxiliary device 100. In the present embodiment, the setting input auxiliary device 100 is configured to be incorporated in the printing press control device 200 as a part of the printing press control device 200. That is, the configuration included in the setting input auxiliary device 100 is also a configuration included in the printing press control device 200, and the procedure executed by the setting input auxiliary device 100 is also the procedure executed by the printing press control device 200. The setting input auxiliary device 100 may be configured to be provided separately from the printing press control device 200 without being incorporated in the printing press control device 200.
 設定入力補助装置100は、入力部110と、表示部120と、撮像部150とが接続されて構成される。入力部110は、印刷機1のオペレーターによって操作される部分である。入力部110は、例えば、キーボードやマウスである。なお、表示部120がタッチパネル式のモニターである場合は、入力部110は、表示部120に含まれる。 The setting input auxiliary device 100 is configured by connecting an input unit 110, a display unit 120, and an imaging unit 150. The input unit 110 is a part operated by an operator of the printing press 1. The input unit 110 is, for example, a keyboard or a mouse. When the display unit 120 is a touch panel monitor, the input unit 110 is included in the display unit 120.
 表示部120は、オペレーターが入力部110を操作して印刷機本体900を制御するために必要な情報を表示する部分である。表示部120は、例えば、CRT(Cathode-Ray Tube)モニターや、液晶モニターである。 The display unit 120 is a part that displays information necessary for an operator to operate the input unit 110 to control the printing press main body 900. The display unit 120 is, for example, a CRT (Cathode-Ray Tube) monitor or a liquid crystal monitor.
 撮像部150は、例えば、第1カメラ151と、第2カメラ152と、第3カメラ153と、第4カメラ154とを含んで構成される。なお、以下に、撮像部150の構成の一例を説明するが、撮像部150に含まれるカメラの数や、カメラを設置する部位は、以下に説明する構成に限定されない。 The imaging unit 150 includes, for example, a first camera 151, a second camera 152, a third camera 153, and a fourth camera 154. In the following, an example of the configuration of the imaging unit 150 will be described. However, the number of cameras included in the imaging unit 150 and the parts where the cameras are installed are not limited to the configuration described below.
 第1カメラ151は、給紙部910に取り付けられる。具体的には、第1カメラ151は、図2に示す紙送り装置920の案内板921の走行面と対向する位置に取り付けられる。これにより、第1カメラ151は、案内板921の走行面を撮像する。また、案内板921の走行面上を紙Sが走行する場合、第1カメラ151は、案内板921の走行面上を走行する紙Sを撮像する。 The first camera 151 is attached to the paper feeding unit 910. Specifically, the first camera 151 is attached at a position facing the traveling surface of the guide plate 921 of the paper feeding device 920 shown in FIG. Thereby, the first camera 151 images the traveling surface of the guide plate 921. When the paper S travels on the traveling surface of the guide plate 921, the first camera 151 images the paper S traveling on the traveling surface of the guide plate 921.
 また、第1カメラ151は、案内板921の走行面のみではなく、紙押さえ部材923と案内板921との間の隙間も撮像できるように取り付けられる。これにより、第1カメラ151は、案内板921及び紙押さえ部材923と、前記隙間を通過する紙Sとを撮像する。 Further, the first camera 151 is attached so that not only the traveling surface of the guide plate 921 but also the gap between the paper pressing member 923 and the guide plate 921 can be imaged. Accordingly, the first camera 151 images the guide plate 921 and the paper pressing member 923 and the paper S passing through the gap.
 このようにして、第1カメラ151は、紙送り装置用空気噴出装置170によって紙Sが案内板921に吸い寄せられて案内板921上を走行する様子と、紙Sが紙押さえ部材923と案内板921との間の隙間を通過する様子とを撮像する。 In this way, the first camera 151 has a state in which the paper S is sucked to the guide plate 921 and travels on the guide plate 921 by the paper blower air jet device 170, and the paper S is moved to the paper holding member 923 and the guide plate. The state of passing through the gap with the 921 is imaged.
 図1に示す第2カメラ152は、反転部950の反転中間胴951と、反転倍胴952と、反転胴953と対向する位置に取り付けられる。ここで、印刷機本体900には、各胴がオペレーターに露出しないように、カバー901に覆われて設けられている。これにより、オペレーターは、各胴を目視する場合、カバー901を開ける必要がある。第2カメラ152は、各胴と対向する位置のうち、カバー901が設けられている側とは反対側のいわゆる裏側に配置される。つまり、第2カメラ152は、オペレーターがカバー901を開けても、オペレーターが目視しにくい部位に取り付けられる。 The second camera 152 shown in FIG. 1 is attached to a position facing the reversal intermediate cylinder 951, reversal magnification cylinder 952, and reversal cylinder 953 of the reversing unit 950. Here, the printer main body 900 is provided with a cover 901 so that each cylinder is not exposed to the operator. Thus, the operator needs to open the cover 901 when viewing each cylinder. The second camera 152 is arranged on a so-called back side opposite to the side where the cover 901 is provided, in a position facing each barrel. That is, even if the operator opens the cover 901, the second camera 152 is attached to a site that is difficult for the operator to see.
 これにより、第2カメラ152は、反転部950の部分のうち、反転部用空気噴出装置180が噴出する空気が導かれる部分を撮像する。よって、第2カメラ152は、紙Sがばたつきを抑制されている様子を撮像する。 Thereby, the second camera 152 images a portion of the reversing unit 950 where the air ejected by the reversing unit air ejection device 180 is guided. Therefore, the second camera 152 captures an image of the paper S being prevented from flapping.
 第3カメラ153及び第4カメラ154は、排紙部960に取り付けられる。第3カメラ153は、チャンバーガイド966と対向する位置に取り付けられる。これにより、第3カメラ153は、排紙部用第1空気噴出装置191が空気を噴出してグリッパー965によって掴まれて搬送される紙Sが案内される様子を撮像する。 The third camera 153 and the fourth camera 154 are attached to the paper discharge unit 960. The third camera 153 is attached at a position facing the chamber guide 966. As a result, the third camera 153 images the state in which the first paper ejection device 191 for paper discharge unit ejects air and is guided by the paper S that is gripped and conveyed by the gripper 965.
 第4カメラ154は、排紙台961と対向して取り付けられる。これにより、第4カメラ154は、排紙部用第2空気噴出装置192が排紙台961に向かって空気を噴出して、紙Sが排紙台961に向かって案内される様子を撮像する。 The fourth camera 154 is attached so as to face the paper discharge table 961. As a result, the fourth camera 154 images the state in which the second air ejection device 192 for the paper ejection unit ejects air toward the paper ejection table 961 and the paper S is guided toward the paper ejection table 961. .
 ここで、撮像部150の各カメラは、印刷機本体900のカバー901やケーシングに囲われた部分、いわゆる印刷機本体900の内部に配置される。印刷機本体900の内部は、紙Sの紙粉が飛散する場合があるため、撮像部150の各カメラのレンズが汚れるおそれがある。 Here, each camera of the imaging unit 150 is arranged in a portion surrounded by the cover 901 and the casing of the printing press main body 900, that is, the so-called printing press main body 900. Since the paper powder of the paper S may be scattered inside the printer main body 900, there is a possibility that the lenses of each camera of the imaging unit 150 may become dirty.
 そこで、撮像部150は、各カメラが印刷機本体900の内部から容易に取り外して清掃できるように構成されると好ましい。または、撮像部150は、各カメラの近傍のケーシングに開け閉めできる窓や扉が形成され、オペレーターが前記窓や扉から手を入れて、レンズを容易に清掃できるように構成されると好ましい。これにより、オペレーターは、仮に撮像部150の各カメラのレンズに紙粉が付着したとしても、容易に各カメラのレンズを清掃できる。 Therefore, it is preferable that the imaging unit 150 is configured so that each camera can be easily removed from the inside of the printing press main body 900 and cleaned. Alternatively, it is preferable that the imaging unit 150 is configured so that a window or a door that can be opened and closed is formed in a casing near each camera, and the operator can easily clean the lens by putting a hand through the window or door. Thereby, even if paper dust adheres to the lens of each camera of the imaging unit 150, the operator can easily clean the lens of each camera.
 また、撮像部150は、各カメラの取り付け角度が、任意に変更できるように構成されると好ましい。撮像部150は、例えば、各カメラの取り付け部分に、角度調節のためのヒンジ部が設けられる。これにより、オペレーターは、撮像部150の各カメラの撮像対象を微調整できる。 Further, it is preferable that the imaging unit 150 is configured so that the mounting angle of each camera can be arbitrarily changed. For example, the imaging unit 150 is provided with a hinge portion for angle adjustment at a mounting portion of each camera. Thereby, the operator can finely adjust the imaging target of each camera of the imaging unit 150.
 撮像部150の各カメラは、設定入力補助装置100に電気的に接続される。これにより、設定入力補助装置100は、撮像部150の各カメラから、撮像対象の映像を取得して表示部120に表示する。具体的には、設定入力補助装置100は、第1カメラ151から取得した給紙部910の映像と、第2カメラ152から取得した反転部950の映像と、第3カメラ153及び第4カメラ154から取得した排紙部960の映像とを表示部120に表示する。 Each camera of the imaging unit 150 is electrically connected to the setting input auxiliary device 100. As a result, the setting input auxiliary device 100 acquires an image to be captured from each camera of the imaging unit 150 and displays the acquired video on the display unit 120. Specifically, the setting input auxiliary device 100 includes the video of the paper feeding unit 910 acquired from the first camera 151, the video of the reversing unit 950 acquired from the second camera 152, the third camera 153, and the fourth camera 154. The display unit 120 displays the image of the paper discharge unit 960 acquired from the above.
 図3は、基準画面が表示されているときの表示部を模式的に示す構成図である。図3に示す画面は、オペレーターがこれから操作を開始する際に表示される画面の一例である。図3に示すように、設定入力補助装置100は、表示部120に、例えば、第1映像表示部131と、第2映像表示部132と、第3映像表示部133と、第4映像表示部134と、ボタン類140とを表示する。 FIG. 3 is a configuration diagram schematically showing the display unit when the reference screen is displayed. The screen shown in FIG. 3 is an example of a screen displayed when the operator starts an operation from now on. As illustrated in FIG. 3, the setting input auxiliary device 100 includes, for example, a first video display unit 131, a second video display unit 132, a third video display unit 133, and a fourth video display unit on the display unit 120. 134 and buttons 140 are displayed.
 設定入力補助装置100は、第1映像表示部131に、例えば、図1に示す第1カメラ151が撮像した給紙部910の映像を表示する。また、設定入力補助装置100は、第2映像表示部132に、例えば、図1に示す第2カメラ152が撮像した反転部950の映像を表示する。 The setting input auxiliary device 100 displays, for example, the image of the paper feeding unit 910 captured by the first camera 151 illustrated in FIG. 1 on the first video display unit 131. Further, the setting input auxiliary device 100 displays, for example, the video of the reversing unit 950 captured by the second camera 152 illustrated in FIG. 1 on the second video display unit 132.
 また、設定入力補助装置100は、第3映像表示部133に、例えば、図1に示す第3カメラ153が撮像した排紙部960の映像であって、排紙部用第1空気噴出装置191によって案内される紙Sの映像を表示する。また、設定入力補助装置100は、第4映像表示部134に、例えば、図1に示す第4カメラ154が撮像した排紙部960の映像であって、排紙部用第2空気噴出装置192によって排紙台961に案内される紙Sの映像を表示する。 In addition, the setting input auxiliary device 100 displays, on the third video display unit 133, for example, an image of the paper discharge unit 960 captured by the third camera 153 illustrated in FIG. 1, and the first air ejection device 191 for the paper discharge unit. The image of the paper S guided by is displayed. In addition, the setting input auxiliary device 100 displays, on the fourth video display unit 134, for example, a video of the paper discharge unit 960 captured by the fourth camera 154 shown in FIG. 1, and the second air ejection device 192 for the paper discharge unit. The image of the paper S guided to the paper discharge tray 961 is displayed.
 ここで、本実施形態のボタン類140は、オペレーターが可動部分を押すことによって2つの接点が接触して所定の信号を発生させる機械式の押しボタンではなく、表示部120に表示される電子的なボタンであって、仮想の操作部である。 Here, the buttons 140 according to the present embodiment are not mechanical push buttons in which two contacts are brought into contact with each other when a movable part is pressed by an operator to generate a predetermined signal, but electronic buttons displayed on the display unit 120. This is a virtual operation unit.
 よって、実際は、ボタン類140は操作を補助するための画像であって、所定の信号を発生させるのではなく、オペレーターが入力部110を操作してボタン類140を操作する作業を設定入力補助装置100が検出すると、設定入力補助装置100が所定の信号を取得したと判断する。 Accordingly, the buttons 140 are actually images for assisting the operation, and instead of generating a predetermined signal, the operator operates the input unit 110 to operate the buttons 140. If 100 detects, it will be judged that the setting input auxiliary device 100 acquired the predetermined signal.
 ボタン類140は、例えば、設定ボタン141と、印刷開始ボタン142と、印刷停止ボタン143と、録画開始ボタン144と、録画停止ボタン145と、再生ボタン146とを含んで構成される。印刷開始ボタン142が操作されると、設定入力補助装置100は印刷開始信号を取得して、印刷機本体900による紙Sへの印刷を開始する。 The buttons 140 include, for example, a setting button 141, a print start button 142, a print stop button 143, a recording start button 144, a recording stop button 145, and a playback button 146. When the print start button 142 is operated, the setting input auxiliary device 100 acquires a print start signal, and starts printing on the paper S by the printer main body 900.
 印刷停止ボタン143が操作されると、設定入力補助装置100は、印刷停止信号を取得して、印刷機本体900による紙Sへの印刷を停止する。録画開始ボタン144と、録画停止ボタン145と、再生ボタン146とについては、後述する。 When the print stop button 143 is operated, the setting input auxiliary device 100 acquires a print stop signal and stops printing on the paper S by the printing machine body 900. The recording start button 144, the recording stop button 145, and the playback button 146 will be described later.
 なお、設定入力補助装置100は、基準画面で第1映像表示部131から第4映像表示部134の4つの画面を必ずしも表示しなくてもよい。設定入力補助装置100は、少なくとも、基準画面で設定ボタン141を表示すればよい。 Note that the setting input auxiliary device 100 does not necessarily display the four screens from the first video display unit 131 to the fourth video display unit 134 on the reference screen. The setting input auxiliary device 100 may display at least the setting button 141 on the reference screen.
 ここで、設定ボタン141は、表示部120上に配置された設定開始操作補助域に表示された画像であって、設定対象の設定をこれから開始する操作を補助するための画像である。このように、設定入力補助装置100は、表示部120に設定開始操作補助域を表示させると共に、設定開始操作補助域に設定ボタン141の画像を表示させる。 Here, the setting button 141 is an image displayed in a setting start operation auxiliary area arranged on the display unit 120, and is an image for assisting an operation for starting setting of a setting target. As described above, the setting input auxiliary device 100 displays the setting start operation auxiliary area on the display unit 120 and displays the image of the setting button 141 in the setting start operation auxiliary area.
 図4は、設定項目リストが表示されているときの表示部を模式的に示す構成図である。設定ボタン141が操作されると、設定入力補助装置100は、図4に示すように、表示部120にオペレーターが設定すべき項目のリストを表示する。設定入力補助装置100は、例えば、表示部120に、昇降装置設定ボタン141aと、紙送り装置用空気噴出装置設定ボタン141bと、反転部用空気噴出装置設定ボタン141cと、排紙部用第1空気噴出装置設定ボタン141dと、排紙部用第2空気噴出装置設定ボタン141eとを表示する。 FIG. 4 is a configuration diagram schematically showing the display unit when the setting item list is displayed. When the setting button 141 is operated, the setting input auxiliary device 100 displays a list of items to be set by the operator on the display unit 120, as shown in FIG. The setting input auxiliary device 100 includes, for example, a lifting / lowering device setting button 141a, a paper feeding device air ejecting device setting button 141b, a reversing unit air ejecting device setting button 141c, and a first discharging unit. An air ejection device setting button 141d and a second air ejection device setting button 141e for the paper discharge unit are displayed.
 昇降装置設定ボタン141aが操作されると、設定入力補助装置100は、特定設定操作開始信号としての昇降装置設定操作開始信号を取得する。昇降装置設定操作開始信号を取得すると、設定入力補助装置100は、現在の画面から、紙押さえ部材923と案内板921との間の隙間の大きさを調節するための画面に切り替える。 When the elevating device setting button 141a is operated, the setting input assisting device 100 acquires an elevating device setting operation start signal as a specific setting operation start signal. When the lifting device setting operation start signal is acquired, the setting input auxiliary device 100 switches from the current screen to a screen for adjusting the size of the gap between the paper pressing member 923 and the guide plate 921.
 紙送り装置用空気噴出装置設定ボタン141bが操作されると、設定入力補助装置100は、特定設定操作開始信号としての紙送り装置用空気噴出装置設定操作開始信号を取得する。紙送り装置用空気噴出装置設定操作開始信号を取得すると、設定入力補助装置100は、現在の画面から、紙送り装置用空気噴出装置170が噴出する空気の流量を調節するための画面に切り替える。 When the paper feeding device air ejection device setting button 141b is operated, the setting input auxiliary device 100 acquires a paper feeding device air ejection device setting operation start signal as a specific setting operation start signal. When the paper feeding device air ejection device setting operation start signal is acquired, the setting input auxiliary device 100 switches from the current screen to a screen for adjusting the flow rate of the air ejected by the paper feeding device air ejection device 170.
 反転部用空気噴出装置設定ボタン141cが操作されると、設定入力補助装置100は、特定設定操作開始信号としての反転部用空気噴出装置設定操作開始信号を取得する。反転部用空気噴出装置設定操作開始信号を取得すると、設定入力補助装置100は、現在の画面から、反転部用空気噴出装置180が噴出する空気の流量を調節するための画面に切り替える。 When the reversing part air ejection device setting button 141c is operated, the setting input auxiliary device 100 acquires the reversing part air ejection device setting operation start signal as the specific setting operation start signal. When the inversion unit air ejection device setting operation start signal is acquired, the setting input auxiliary device 100 switches from the current screen to a screen for adjusting the flow rate of the air ejected by the inversion unit air ejection device 180.
 排紙部用第1空気噴出装置設定ボタン141dが操作されると、設定入力補助装置100は、特定設定操作開始信号としての排紙部用第1空気噴出装置設定操作開始信号を取得する。排紙部用第1空気噴出装置設定操作開始信号を取得すると、設定入力補助装置100は、現在の画面から、排紙部用第1空気噴出装置191が噴出する空気の流量を調節するための画面に切り替える。 When the paper discharge unit first air ejection device setting button 141d is operated, the setting input auxiliary device 100 acquires a paper discharge unit first air ejection device setting operation start signal as a specific setting operation start signal. When the first discharge unit setting operation start signal is acquired, the setting input auxiliary device 100 adjusts the flow rate of the air discharged from the first discharge unit 191 for discharge unit from the current screen. Switch to the screen.
 排紙部用第2空気噴出装置設定ボタン141eが操作されると、設定入力補助装置100は、特定設定操作開始信号としての排紙部用第2空気噴出装置設定操作開始信号を取得する。排紙部用第2空気噴出装置設定操作開始信号を取得すると、設定入力補助装置100は、現在の画面から、排紙部用第2空気噴出装置192が噴出する空気の流量を調節するための画面に切り替える。 When the paper discharge unit second air ejection device setting button 141e is operated, the setting input assisting device 100 acquires a paper discharge unit second air ejection device setting operation start signal as a specific setting operation start signal. When the second discharge unit setting operation start signal is acquired, the setting input auxiliary device 100 adjusts the flow rate of the air discharged from the second discharge unit 192 for discharge unit from the current screen. Switch to the screen.
 以下、昇降装置設定操作開始信号と、紙送り装置用空気噴出装置設定操作開始信号と、反転部用空気噴出装置設定操作開始信号と、排紙部用第1空気噴出装置設定操作開始信号と、排紙部用第2空気噴出装置設定操作開始信号とを総じて、設定操作開始信号という。次に、設定入力補助装置100が設定操作開始信号を取得した際に表示部120に表示される設定画面の構成を説明する。 Hereinafter, a lifting device setting operation start signal, a paper feeding device air jetting device setting operation start signal, a reversing unit air jetting device setting operation start signal, a paper discharge unit first air jetting device setting operation start signal, The sheet discharge unit second air ejection device setting operation start signal is collectively referred to as a setting operation start signal. Next, the configuration of the setting screen displayed on the display unit 120 when the setting input auxiliary device 100 acquires the setting operation start signal will be described.
 図5は、実施形態1の設定画面が表示されているときの表示部を模式的に示す構成図である。設定操作開始信号を取得すると、設定入力補助装置100は、図5に示すように、表示部120に、録画時間表示部138と、設定操作補助域147と、プリセット選択部148とを表示する。 FIG. 5 is a configuration diagram schematically showing a display unit when the setting screen of the first embodiment is displayed. When the setting operation start signal is acquired, the setting input auxiliary device 100 displays a recording time display unit 138, a setting operation auxiliary area 147, and a preset selection unit 148 on the display unit 120 as shown in FIG.
 設定入力補助装置100は、設定対象映像表示部136に、オペレーターがこれから設定する対象である設定対象の映像を表示する。設定入力補助装置100は、設定操作補助域147に、設定対象を制御するための数値である設定値を入力するための入力部の画像や、設定値を変更するためのボタンや、前記数値を入力する入力部の代わりに例えばスライダーの画像を表示する。 The setting input auxiliary device 100 displays on the setting target video display unit 136 a setting target video that is a target to be set by the operator. The setting input auxiliary device 100 inputs an image of an input unit for inputting a setting value, which is a numerical value for controlling a setting target, a button for changing the setting value, and the numerical value in the setting operation auxiliary area 147. For example, a slider image is displayed instead of the input unit.
 ここで、設定操作補助域147は、設定対象を制御するための設定値の入力を補助する画像が表示させる領域である。オペレーターは、設定操作補助域147に表示される画像を見て、入力部110を操作する。これにより、オペレーターは、設定値を入力する。 Here, the setting operation assistance area 147 is an area in which an image for assisting input of a setting value for controlling a setting target is displayed. The operator looks at the image displayed in the setting operation auxiliary area 147 and operates the input unit 110. Thus, the operator inputs a set value.
 このように、オペレーターが実際に操作する対象は入力部110であるが、設定入力補助装置100は、オペレーターに設定操作補助域147を操作していると思わせて、設定値の入力を補助する。よって、以下の説明では、実際はオペレーターが入力部110を操作して設定値を入力していても、オペレーターが設定操作補助域147を操作して設定値を入力しているものとして説明する。 In this way, the target that the operator actually operates is the input unit 110, but the setting input assisting device 100 assists the input of the setting value by making the operator think that the setting operation assisting area 147 is operated. . Therefore, in the following description, even if the operator actually operates the input unit 110 and inputs a set value, the description assumes that the operator operates the setting operation auxiliary area 147 and inputs the set value.
 オペレーターは、設定操作補助域147を操作することによって、設定対象の設定を行う。なお、ここでは、オペレーターが前記スライダーを操作することは、オペレーターが設定値を入力することと同じものとして取り扱う。 The operator operates the setting operation auxiliary area 147 to set the setting target. Here, the operation of the slider by the operator is treated as the same as the input of the setting value by the operator.
 設定入力補助装置100は、プリセット選択部148に、あらかじめ設定されている設定値であって、設定対象を制御するための数値の例を表示する。以下、あらかじめ設定されている数値をプリセット値という。オペレーターは、プリセット選択部148を操作して、例示されているプリセット値を選択することによって、設定操作補助域147を操作せずに、設定対象の設定を完了できる。 The setting input auxiliary device 100 displays, on the preset selection unit 148, examples of numerical values that are preset setting values and control the setting target. Hereinafter, preset numerical values are referred to as preset values. The operator can complete the setting of the setting target without operating the setting operation auxiliary area 147 by operating the preset selection unit 148 and selecting the exemplified preset value.
 例えば、設定入力補助装置100は、オペレーターが設定操作補助域147を操作して入力した数値を、記憶装置に記憶する。そして、次回以降、記憶部に記憶した前記数値を、プリセット値としてプリセット選択部148に表示する。オペレーターは、前記プリセット値を選択することにより、設定操作補助域147を操作せずに、前回と同じ設定で、設定対象の設定を完了できる。 For example, the setting input auxiliary device 100 stores the numerical value input by the operator by operating the setting operation auxiliary area 147 in the storage device. From the next time, the numerical value stored in the storage unit is displayed as a preset value on the preset selection unit 148. By selecting the preset value, the operator can complete the setting target setting with the same setting as the previous time without operating the setting operation auxiliary area 147.
 ここで、反転部用空気噴出装置180のように、複数の装置によって構成される装置の設定値は、複数の設定値の組み合わせとなる。このような場合、設定入力補助装置100は、この複数の設定値の組み合わせを、プリセット値として表示部120に表示する。これにより、オペレーターは、設定操作補助域147に表示される複数のスライダーを個別に操作することなく、容易に設定対象の設定を完了できる。これにより、設定入力補助装置100は、オペレーターの作業量を低減できる。 Here, a set value of a device constituted by a plurality of devices, such as the reversing part air jet device 180, is a combination of a plurality of set values. In such a case, the setting input auxiliary device 100 displays the combination of the plurality of setting values on the display unit 120 as a preset value. Thus, the operator can easily complete setting of the setting target without individually operating the plurality of sliders displayed in the setting operation auxiliary area 147. Thereby, setting input auxiliary device 100 can reduce an operator's work amount.
 ここで、設定入力補助装置100が昇降装置設定操作開始信号を取得した場合、設定入力補助装置100は、設定対象映像表示部136に給紙部910の映像、具体的には、紙押さえ部材923と案内板921との間の隙間の映像を表示する。また、設定入力補助装置100は、設定操作補助域147に、昇降装置923aを移動させて紙押さえ部材923と案内板921との間の隙間の大きさを調節するためのスライダーを表示する。 Here, when the setting input auxiliary device 100 acquires the lifting device setting operation start signal, the setting input auxiliary device 100 displays the image of the paper feeding unit 910 on the setting target video display unit 136, specifically, the paper pressing member 923. And an image of the gap between the guide plate 921 and the guide plate 921. In addition, the setting input auxiliary device 100 displays a slider for adjusting the size of the gap between the paper pressing member 923 and the guide plate 921 by moving the lifting device 923a in the setting operation auxiliary area 147.
 設定入力補助装置100が紙送り装置用空気噴出装置設定操作開始信号を取得した場合、設定入力補助装置100は、設定対象映像表示部136に給紙部910の映像、具体的には、案内板921の走行面を走行する紙Sの映像を表示する。また、設定入力補助装置100は、設定操作補助域147に、紙送り装置用空気噴出装置170から噴出する空気の流量を調節するためのスライダーを表示する。 When the setting input auxiliary device 100 acquires the paper feeding device air ejection device setting operation start signal, the setting input auxiliary device 100 displays the image of the paper feeding unit 910 on the setting target video display unit 136, specifically, a guide plate. An image of the paper S traveling on the traveling surface 921 is displayed. In addition, the setting input assist device 100 displays a slider for adjusting the flow rate of the air ejected from the paper ejecting device air ejecting device 170 in the setting operation assisting region 147.
 設定入力補助装置100が反転部用空気噴出装置設定操作開始信号を取得した場合、設定入力補助装置100は、設定対象映像表示部136に反転部950の映像、具体的には、反転部950の部分であって反転部用空気噴出装置180が噴出した空気が導かれている部分の映像を表示する。また、設定入力補助装置100は、設定操作補助域147に、反転部用空気噴出装置180から噴出する空気の流量を調節するためのスライダーを表示する。 When the setting input auxiliary device 100 acquires the reversing unit air ejection device setting operation start signal, the setting input auxiliary device 100 displays the video of the reversing unit 950 on the setting target video display unit 136, specifically, the reversing unit 950. The image of the portion where the air ejected by the reversing portion air ejection device 180 is guided is displayed. In addition, the setting input assist device 100 displays a slider for adjusting the flow rate of the air ejected from the reversing part air ejecting device 180 in the setting operation assisting region 147.
 ここで、反転部用空気噴出装置180は、本実施形態では、4つの空気噴出装置を含んで構成される。よって、設定入力補助装置100は、設定操作補助域147に、反転部用第1空気噴出装置181から噴出する空気の流量を調節するためのスライダーと、反転部用第2空気噴出装置182から噴出する空気の流量を調節するためのスライダーと、反転部用第3空気噴出装置183から噴出する空気の流量を調節するためのスライダーと、反転部用第4空気噴出装置184から噴出する空気の流量を調節するためのスライダーとを表示する。 Here, in the present embodiment, the reversing unit air ejection device 180 is configured to include four air ejection devices. Therefore, the setting input assisting device 100 ejects the setting operation assisting region 147 from the slider for adjusting the flow rate of the air ejected from the first reversing unit air ejection device 181 and the second reversing unit air ejecting device 182. A slider for adjusting the flow rate of the air to be moved, a slider for adjusting the flow rate of the air ejected from the third air ejection device 183 for the reversing unit, and the flow rate of the air ejected from the fourth air ejection device 184 for the reversing unit And a slider for adjusting.
 設定入力補助装置100が排紙部用第1空気噴出装置設定操作開始信号を取得した場合、設定入力補助装置100は、設定対象映像表示部136に第3カメラ153が撮像した排紙部960の映像、具体的には、チャンバーガイド966に沿って走行する紙Sの映像を表示する。また、設定入力補助装置100は、設定操作補助域147に、排紙部用第1空気噴出装置191から噴出する空気の流量を調節するためのスライダーを表示する。 When the setting input auxiliary device 100 acquires the first discharge unit setting operation start signal for the paper discharge unit, the setting input auxiliary device 100 captures the setting target video display unit 136 of the paper discharge unit 960 captured by the third camera 153. An image, specifically, an image of the paper S traveling along the chamber guide 966 is displayed. In addition, the setting input assist device 100 displays a slider for adjusting the flow rate of the air ejected from the first paper ejection device 191 for the paper discharge unit in the setting operation assist area 147.
 設定入力補助装置100が排紙部用第2空気噴出装置設定操作開始信号を取得した場合、設定入力補助装置100は、設定対象映像表示部136に第4カメラ154が撮像した排紙部960の映像、具体的には、排紙台961に案内される紙Sの映像を表示する。また、設定入力補助装置100は、設定操作補助域147に、排紙部用第2空気噴出装置192から噴出する空気の流量を調節するためのスライダーを表示する。 When the setting input auxiliary device 100 acquires the second discharge unit setting operation start signal for the paper discharge unit, the setting input auxiliary device 100 captures the setting target video display unit 136 of the paper discharge unit 960 captured by the fourth camera 154. An image, specifically, an image of the paper S guided to the paper discharge tray 961 is displayed. In addition, the setting input assist device 100 displays a slider for adjusting the flow rate of the air ejected from the second air ejecting device 192 for the paper discharge unit in the setting operation assisting area 147.
 以上のように、設定入力補助装置100は、表示部120に、取得した設定操作開始信号に対応した設定対象の映像と共に、前記設定対象を制御するための設定操作補助域とを表示する。これにより、オペレーターは、設定対象映像表示部136にリアルタイムで表示されている前記設定対象を確認しながら、設定操作補助域147またはプリセット選択部148を操作して前記設定対象の設定を行うことができる。 As described above, the setting input auxiliary device 100 displays the setting operation auxiliary area for controlling the setting object together with the setting object video corresponding to the acquired setting operation start signal on the display unit 120. Thus, the operator can set the setting target by operating the setting operation auxiliary area 147 or the preset selection unit 148 while confirming the setting target displayed in real time on the setting target video display unit 136. it can.
 ここで、従来、設定対象の設定をする場合、オペレーターは、制御装置から離れて設定対象を目視する必要があった。しかしながら、設定入力補助装置100を用いれば、オペレーターは、設定入力補助装置100から離れずに、手元で設定対象の映像を確認しながら、制御対象の設定を行うことができる。よって、設定入力補助装置100は、オペレーターの作業量を低減できる。 Here, conventionally, when setting the setting target, the operator has to visually check the setting target away from the control device. However, if the setting input auxiliary device 100 is used, the operator can set the control target while confirming the setting target video at hand without leaving the setting input auxiliary device 100. Therefore, the setting input auxiliary device 100 can reduce the amount of work for the operator.
 また、設定入力補助装置100は、設定対象の映像を自動で表示部120に表示する。よって、設定入力補助装置100を用いれば、オペレーターは、映像を手動で切り替える必要がない。これにより、設定入力補助装置100は、さらに好適にオペレーターの作業量を低減できる。 Also, the setting input auxiliary device 100 automatically displays the setting target video on the display unit 120. Therefore, if the setting input auxiliary device 100 is used, the operator does not need to manually switch the video. Thereby, setting input auxiliary device 100 can reduce an operator's workload more suitably.
 なお、表示部120に表示される映像は、なめらかな動画に限定されず、静止画が連続して表示されるような、いわゆるコマ落ちした動画であってもよい。つまり、表示部120に表示される映像は、オペレーターが設定操作補助域147を操作して、設定対象映像表示部136を見ることで設定値が適正であったか否かを確認できる程度の質が確保されていればよい。 Note that the video displayed on the display unit 120 is not limited to a smooth moving image, and may be a so-called dropped frame moving image in which still images are continuously displayed. In other words, the video displayed on the display unit 120 has a quality that allows the operator to check whether the set value is appropriate by operating the setting operation auxiliary area 147 and viewing the setting target video display unit 136. It only has to be done.
 また、本実施形態では、設定入力補助装置100は、1つの表示部120が接続されるものとして説明したが、設定入力補助装置100は、複数の表示部120が接続されることでマルチモニターシステムに構成されてもよい。 In the present embodiment, the setting input auxiliary device 100 is described as being connected to one display unit 120. However, the setting input auxiliary device 100 is connected to a plurality of display units 120 so that a multi-monitor system is connected. May be configured.
 例えば、設定入力補助装置100に第1表示部と第2表示部とが接続される場合、設定入力補助装置100は、取得した設定操作開始信号に対応した設定対象の映像を第1表示部に表示し、前記設定対象を制御するための設定操作補助域を第2表示部に表示する。 For example, when the first display unit and the second display unit are connected to the setting input auxiliary device 100, the setting input auxiliary device 100 displays the setting target video corresponding to the acquired setting operation start signal on the first display unit. And a setting operation auxiliary area for controlling the setting object is displayed on the second display unit.
 このように設定入力補助装置100が構成されても、オペレーターは、設定対象映像表示部136にリアルタイムで表示されている前記設定対象を確認しながら、設定操作補助域147またはプリセット選択部148を操作して前記設定対象の設定を行うことができる。よって、設定入力補助装置100は、オペレーターの作業量を低減できる。 Even when the setting input auxiliary device 100 is configured in this way, the operator operates the setting operation auxiliary area 147 or the preset selection unit 148 while checking the setting target displayed in real time on the setting target video display unit 136. Thus, the setting target can be set. Therefore, the setting input auxiliary device 100 can reduce the amount of work for the operator.
 設定入力補助装置100は、枚葉印刷機以外にも、例えば、被記録媒体としてのウェブに印刷を施す輪転印刷機を制御してもよい。この場合、カメラは、例えば、給紙部に取り付けられる。設定入力補助装置100は、給紙部の映像、具体的には、例えば、ペースターユニットの映像を表示部120に表示すると共に、前記ペースターユニットを制御するための設定操作補助域を表示部120に表示する。 The setting input auxiliary device 100 may control, for example, a rotary printing machine that performs printing on a web as a recording medium in addition to the sheet-fed printing machine. In this case, the camera is attached to, for example, a paper feeding unit. The setting input auxiliary device 100 displays an image of a paper feeding unit, specifically, for example, an image of a paster unit on the display unit 120 and a setting operation auxiliary area for controlling the paster unit on the display unit 120. indicate.
 また、設定入力補助装置100がウェブに印刷を施す輪転印刷機を制御する場合、例えば、カメラは、折機の内部に取り付けられる。設定入力補助装置100は、折機の内部の映像を表示部120に表示すると共に、折り位置やチョッパ位置を微調整するための設定操作補助域を表示部120に表示する。 Further, when the setting input auxiliary device 100 controls a rotary printing press that performs printing on the web, for example, the camera is attached to the inside of the folding machine. The setting input auxiliary device 100 displays an image inside the folding machine on the display unit 120 and displays a setting operation auxiliary area for fine adjustment of the folding position and the chopper position on the display unit 120.
 この場合であっても、設定入力補助装置100は、オペレーターが制御装置から離れて設定対象を目視しながら設定対象の設定を行う必要がない。また、設定入力補助装置100は、オペレーターが手動で映像を切り替える必要もない。よって、設定入力補助装置100は、ウェブに印刷を施す輪転印刷機を制御する場合であっても、オペレーターの作業量を低減できる。 Even in this case, the setting input auxiliary device 100 does not require the operator to set the setting target while viewing the setting target away from the control device. In addition, the setting input auxiliary device 100 does not require the operator to manually switch the video. Therefore, the setting input auxiliary device 100 can reduce the amount of work for the operator even when controlling a rotary printing press that performs printing on the web.
 次に、表示部120に表示される他のボタンや表示部の説明をする。図3に示すように、設定入力補助装置100は、表示部120に、例えば、全体表示部135を表示する。設定入力補助装置100は、全体表示部135に印刷機本体900を模式的に表した全体図を表示すると共に、現在、表示部120に表示されている映像の撮像対象を、前記全体図の対応する箇所に例えば丸印で示す。 Next, other buttons and display units displayed on the display unit 120 will be described. As illustrated in FIG. 3, the setting input auxiliary device 100 displays, for example, an entire display unit 135 on the display unit 120. The setting input auxiliary device 100 displays an overall view schematically showing the printing machine main body 900 on the overall display unit 135, and the imaging target currently displayed on the display unit 120 corresponds to the overall view. For example, it is indicated by a circle.
 例えば、図3では、表示部120に、第1映像表示部131から第4映像表示部134のすべての映像が表示されているため、設定入力補助装置100は、全体表示部135に、排紙部960の二箇所と、給紙部910と、反転部950と、のすべてに丸印が付加された印刷機本体900の全体図を表示する。 For example, in FIG. 3, since all the images from the first image display unit 131 to the fourth image display unit 134 are displayed on the display unit 120, the setting input auxiliary device 100 displays the paper discharge on the entire display unit 135. A general view of the printer main body 900 is displayed in which circles are added to all of the two portions of the portion 960, the paper feeding portion 910, and the reversing portion 950.
 図6は、制御装置を模式的に示す構成図である。設定入力補助装置100は、例えば、カメラサーバ160を含んで構成される。カメラサーバ160は、撮像部150の各カメラが電気的に接続される。これにより、カメラサーバ160は、印刷機本体900の各箇所の映像を撮像部150から取得する。 FIG. 6 is a block diagram schematically showing the control device. The setting input auxiliary device 100 includes a camera server 160, for example. The camera server 160 is electrically connected to each camera of the imaging unit 150. As a result, the camera server 160 acquires the video of each part of the printing press main body 900 from the imaging unit 150.
 カメラサーバ160は、記憶手段としての記憶装置161と、着脱可能記憶装置接続装置162と、通信回線接続装置163とを含んで構成される。記憶装置161は、例えば、ハードディスクである。記憶装置161は、撮像部150が撮像した映像を録画映像として格納する。 The camera server 160 includes a storage device 161 as storage means, a removable storage device connection device 162, and a communication line connection device 163. The storage device 161 is, for example, a hard disk. The storage device 161 stores the video captured by the imaging unit 150 as a recorded video.
 ここで、図3に示すように、表示部120には、録画開始ボタン144と、録画停止ボタン145と、再生ボタン146と、録画時間表示部138とが表示される。オペレーターが録画開始ボタン144を操作すると、カメラサーバ160は、記憶装置161に録画停止ボタン145が操作されるまでの間の印刷機本体900の映像を録画する。 Here, as shown in FIG. 3, the display unit 120 displays a recording start button 144, a recording stop button 145, a playback button 146, and a recording time display unit 138. When the operator operates the recording start button 144, the camera server 160 records the video of the printing machine main body 900 until the recording stop button 145 is operated in the storage device 161.
 ここで、録画する映像は、第1映像表示部131から第4映像表示部134に表示させる4つの映像のすべてでもよいし、4つの映像の中からオペレーターが選択した映像のみでもよい。 Here, the video to be recorded may be all four videos displayed on the fourth video display unit 134 from the first video display unit 131, or only the video selected by the operator from the four videos.
 また、設定入力補助装置100は、設定操作開始信号を取得してから、図5に示す設定対象映像表示部136に表示する映像を、自動的に録画して記憶装置161に格納する構成でもよい。 The setting input auxiliary device 100 may be configured to automatically record the video to be displayed on the setting target video display unit 136 shown in FIG. 5 after acquiring the setting operation start signal and store the video in the storage device 161. .
 印刷機本体900の各部の映像を録画している最中、設定入力補助装置100は、録画時間表示部138に録画時間を表示する。そして、録画停止ボタン145が操作されると、設定入力補助装置100は、録画を終了すると共に、録画した映像を記憶装置161に格納する。 While the video of each part of the printing press main body 900 is being recorded, the setting input auxiliary device 100 displays the recording time on the recording time display unit 138. When the recording stop button 145 is operated, the setting input auxiliary device 100 ends the recording and stores the recorded video in the storage device 161.
 また、設定入力補助装置100は、再生ボタン146が操作されると、例えば、記憶装置161に格納されている録画映像のリストを表示部120に表示する。オペレーターが前記リストの中から所望の録画映像を選択すると、設定入力補助装置100は、表示部120に前記所望の録画映像を表示する。 In addition, when the playback button 146 is operated, the setting input auxiliary device 100 displays a list of recorded videos stored in the storage device 161 on the display unit 120, for example. When the operator selects a desired recorded video from the list, the setting input auxiliary device 100 displays the desired recorded video on the display unit 120.
 着脱可能記憶装置接続装置162は、カメラサーバ160に着脱できる記憶手段である記憶媒体をカメラサーバ160に接続するための装置である。前記記憶媒体とは、例えば、シリコンディスクである。シリコンディスクには、記憶装置161に格納されている録画映像と同じ映像が格納される。 The detachable storage device connection device 162 is a device for connecting a storage medium, which is a storage means that can be attached to and detached from the camera server 160, to the camera server 160. The storage medium is, for example, a silicon disk. The same video as the recorded video stored in the storage device 161 is stored in the silicon disk.
 なお、シリコンディスクは、記憶装置161に比べて格納できる総容量の確保が難しい。そこで、設定入力補助装置100は、記憶装置161に記憶されている録画映像の一部をシリコンディスクに保存する構成でもよい。 Note that it is difficult to secure the total capacity of a silicon disk that can be stored compared to the storage device 161. Therefore, the setting input auxiliary device 100 may be configured to save a part of the recorded video stored in the storage device 161 on a silicon disk.
 このようにして、設定入力補助装置100は、着脱可能記憶装置接続装置162に接続されるシリコンディスクに印刷機本体900の各部の録画映像を格納できる。これにより、例えば、印刷機本体900のメンテナンスをする整備作業者は、シリコンディスクを自社に持ち帰って印刷機本体900に不具合が生じた際の印刷機本体900の各部の録画映像を容易に確認できる。よって、設定入力補助装置100は、印刷機本体900をメンテナンスする整備作業者の手間を低減できる。 In this way, the setting input auxiliary device 100 can store the recorded video of each part of the printer main body 900 on the silicon disk connected to the removable storage device connection device 162. Thereby, for example, a maintenance worker who performs maintenance of the printing press main body 900 can easily check the recorded video of each part of the printing press main body 900 when the malfunction occurs in the printing press main body 900 by taking the silicon disk home. . Therefore, the setting input auxiliary device 100 can reduce the labor of a maintenance worker who maintains the printing machine main body 900.
 通信回線接続装置163は、カメラサーバ160を通信回線に接続し、撮像部150から取得した映像を、通信回線を介して設定入力補助装置100とは別の表示装置、例えば、パーソナルコンピュータ800に提供するための装置である。 The communication line connection device 163 connects the camera server 160 to the communication line, and provides the video acquired from the imaging unit 150 to a display device other than the setting input auxiliary device 100 via the communication line, for example, the personal computer 800. It is a device for doing.
 これにより、カメラサーバ160が通信回線を介して外部の表示装置に印刷機本体900の映像を提供できる構成であれば、例えば遠隔地に設けられているパーソナルコンピュータ800も、通信回線を介して印刷機本体900の映像を取得できる。なお、通信回線とは、例えば、インターネットである。 As a result, if the camera server 160 can provide the image of the printer main body 900 to an external display device via a communication line, for example, a personal computer 800 provided at a remote location can also print via the communication line. The image of the main body 900 can be acquired. The communication line is, for example, the Internet.
 これにより、印刷機本体900の管理者は、印刷機1が設置されている現場に出向くことなく、印刷機本体900の運転状態を確認できる。よって、設定入力補助装置100は、印刷機本体900の管理者の手間を低減できる。 Thereby, the administrator of the printing press main body 900 can check the operation state of the printing press main body 900 without going to the site where the printing press 1 is installed. Therefore, the setting input auxiliary device 100 can reduce the labor of the administrator of the printing press main body 900.
(実施形態2)
 実施形態2の設定入力補助装置は、実施形態1の設定入力補助装置100が有する機能に加えて、新たな機能を有する。また、実施形態2の設定入力補助装置を含んで構成される印刷機制御装置や印刷機も同様に、実施形態1の印刷機制御装置200や印刷機1が有する機能に加えて、前記新たな機能を有する。以下、実施形態2の設定入力補助装置や印刷機制御装置や印刷機が有する新たな機能について説明する。なお、実施形態2の設定入力補助装置の構成は実施形態1の設定入力補助装置100と同様である。よって、実施形態1の設定入力補助装置100と同一の機能を有する要素には同一の符号を付す。
(Embodiment 2)
The setting input auxiliary device of the second embodiment has a new function in addition to the functions of the setting input auxiliary device 100 of the first embodiment. Similarly, the printing press control apparatus and the printing press that include the setting input auxiliary device of the second embodiment similarly to the new functions in addition to the functions of the printing press control apparatus 200 and the printing press 1 of the first embodiment. It has a function. Hereinafter, new functions of the setting input auxiliary device, the printing press control device, and the printing press according to the second embodiment will be described. Note that the configuration of the setting input auxiliary device of the second embodiment is the same as that of the setting input auxiliary device 100 of the first embodiment. Therefore, elements having the same functions as those of the setting input auxiliary device 100 of the first embodiment are denoted by the same reference numerals.
 図7は、追跡画面が表示されているときの表示部を模式的に示す構成図である。図7に示すように、設定入力補助装置は、表示部120に追跡画面を表示する。追跡画面は、全体表示部135と、第1映像表示部131から第4映像表示部134と、備考表示部31と、紙指定部32とが含まれる。本実施形態の第1映像表示部131から第4映像表示部134の各映像表示部は、映像として静止画を表示する。但し、前記各映像表示部は、映像として動画を表示してもよい。設定入力補助装置は、例えば、第1映像表示部131から第4映像表示部134を1つずつ一列に並べて表示部120に表示させる。そして、設定入力補助装置は、配列された第1映像表示部131から第4映像表示部134を表示部120に複数列表示させる。なお、設定入力補助装置は、配列された第1映像表示部131から第4映像表示部134を表示部120に一列のみ表示させてもよい。 FIG. 7 is a configuration diagram schematically showing the display unit when the tracking screen is displayed. As illustrated in FIG. 7, the setting input auxiliary device displays a tracking screen on the display unit 120. The tracking screen includes an entire display unit 135, a first video display unit 131 to a fourth video display unit 134, a remark display unit 31, and a paper designation unit 32. Each video display unit from the first video display unit 131 to the fourth video display unit 134 of the present embodiment displays a still image as a video. However, each said video display part may display a moving image as an image | video. For example, the setting input auxiliary device displays the first video display unit 131 to the fourth video display unit 134 in a line on the display unit 120 one by one. Then, the setting input auxiliary device causes the display unit 120 to display a plurality of rows of the fourth video display unit 134 from the arranged first video display unit 131. Note that the setting input auxiliary device may display only one line of the arranged first video display unit 131 to fourth video display unit 134 on the display unit 120.
 備考表示部31は、図1に示す第1カメラ151から第4カメラ154の各カメラが設定対象を撮像した際に設定されていた印刷条件を表示する部分である。以下、第1カメラ151から第4カメラ154の各カメラを区別しない場合は、単にカメラという。印刷条件とは、例えば、紙Sが印刷機本体900を走行する速度である印刷速度や、紙Sのサイズ(平面寸法)や、紙Sの厚さや、紙Sの種類や、印刷機本体900が紙Sに印刷を施す際に用いられる色数である。また、備考表示部31は、例えば、メモ欄を含む。このメモ欄は、オペレーターが任意の情報を記載できる部分である。 Remarks display unit 31 is a part that displays the printing conditions set when each of the first camera 151 to the fourth camera 154 shown in FIG. Hereinafter, when the first camera 151 to the fourth camera 154 are not distinguished from each other, they are simply referred to as cameras. The printing conditions include, for example, the printing speed at which the paper S travels the printing machine main body 900, the size of the paper S (planar dimensions), the thickness of the paper S, the type of the paper S, and the printing machine main body 900. Is the number of colors used when printing on the paper S. Moreover, the remark display part 31 contains a memo column, for example. This memo field is a part where the operator can write arbitrary information.
 紙指定部32は、給紙部910から排紙部960に向かって流れる複数の紙Sの中から特定の紙Sを指定するための部分である。紙指定部32は、第1映像表示部131から第4映像表示部134が成す列毎に表示部120に表示される。すなわち、本実施形態では、紙指定部32は、3つ表示部120に表示される。紙指定部32は、例えば、「1枚目~20枚目」のように、複数の紙Sの中から特定の紙Sを範囲で指定できる。なお、紙指定部32は、範囲ではなく、複数の紙Sの中から特定の紙Sを1枚指定できるものでもよい。オペレーターは、特定の紙Sを指定する数値を紙指定部32に入力する。 The paper designating unit 32 is a part for designating a specific paper S from among a plurality of papers S flowing from the paper supply unit 910 toward the paper discharge unit 960. The paper designation unit 32 is displayed on the display unit 120 for each row formed by the first video display unit 131 to the fourth video display unit 134. That is, in the present embodiment, the three paper designation units 32 are displayed on the display unit 120. The paper designating unit 32 can designate a specific paper S from a plurality of papers S as a range, for example, “first sheet to 20th sheet”. The paper designating unit 32 may be one that can designate one specific paper S from a plurality of papers S instead of a range. The operator inputs a numerical value designating a specific paper S into the paper designating unit 32.
 本実施形態では、図6に示す記憶装置161は、各カメラによって撮像された映像と共に、特定情報と、その時(各カメラが設定対象を撮像した時)の印刷速度とを格納する。特定情報とは、複数の紙Sが流れる様子が撮像された映像の全範囲から、特定の紙Sが撮像された部分を抽出するための情報である。本実施形態では、記憶装置161は、例えば、給紙部910から排紙部960に向けて紙Sを送り始めてから経過した時間を特定情報として格納する。以下、給紙部910から排紙部960に向けて紙Sを送り始めてから経過した時間を経過時間という。設定入力補助装置は、この経過時間と、印刷速度とに基づいて、複数の紙Sの中から、ある時期にカメラによって撮像された紙Sを特定する。 In this embodiment, the storage device 161 shown in FIG. 6 stores the specific information and the printing speed at that time (when each camera images the setting target) together with the video imaged by each camera. The specific information is information for extracting a part in which the specific paper S is imaged from the entire range of the video in which a plurality of papers S are captured. In the present embodiment, for example, the storage device 161 stores, as specific information, the time that has elapsed since the paper S started to be fed from the paper supply unit 910 toward the paper discharge unit 960. Hereinafter, the time elapsed after the paper S starts to be fed from the paper supply unit 910 toward the paper discharge unit 960 is referred to as elapsed time. Based on the elapsed time and the printing speed, the setting input auxiliary device identifies the paper S imaged by the camera at a certain time from among the plurality of papers S.
 設定入力補助装置は、複数の紙Sの中から特定の紙Sを指定する操作、すなわち、紙指定部32に数値が入力されると、その列の第1映像表示部131から第4映像表示部134に、各設定対象の映像を表示させる。第1映像表示部131から第4映像表示部134に表示される映像は、紙指定部32に入力された特定の紙Sが撮像された映像である。設定入力補助装置は、まず、記憶装置161から特定情報と、その時の印刷速度とを取得する。 When the setting input assisting device designates a specific paper S from among a plurality of papers S, that is, when a numerical value is input to the paper designation unit 32, the first video display unit 131 in the column displays the fourth video. The image of each setting target is displayed on the unit 134. The video displayed on the fourth video display unit 134 from the first video display unit 131 is a video obtained by capturing the specific paper S input to the paper designating unit 32. The setting input auxiliary device first acquires the specific information and the printing speed at that time from the storage device 161.
 そして、設定入力補助装置は、紙指定部32に入力された値(複数の紙Sの中から特定の範囲を指定する値)を、設定対象毎に経過時間に換算する。次に、設定入力補助装置は、記憶装置161から取得した映像の全範囲から、換算された経過時間に該当する部分を特定する。設定入力補助装置は、その部分の映像を第1映像表示部131から第4映像表示部134に表示する。これにより、設定入力補助装置は、特定の紙Sが図1に示す給紙部910の紙送り装置920に至った際の映像を第1映像表示部131に表示させる。また、設定入力補助装置は、特定の紙Sが反転部950に至った際の映像を第2映像表示部132に表示させる。また、設定入力補助装置は、特定の紙Sが排紙部960のチェーン962に至った際の映像を第3映像表示部133に表示させる。また、設定入力補助装置は、特定の紙Sが排紙部960の排紙台961に至った際の映像を第4映像表示部134に表示させる。 Then, the setting input auxiliary device converts the value input to the paper specifying unit 32 (a value specifying a specific range from the plurality of papers S) into an elapsed time for each setting target. Next, the setting input auxiliary device specifies a portion corresponding to the converted elapsed time from the entire range of the video acquired from the storage device 161. The setting input auxiliary device displays the video of the portion from the first video display unit 131 to the fourth video display unit 134. As a result, the setting input auxiliary device causes the first video display unit 131 to display an image when the specific paper S reaches the paper feeding device 920 of the paper feeding unit 910 shown in FIG. In addition, the setting input auxiliary device causes the second video display unit 132 to display a video when the specific paper S reaches the reversing unit 950. In addition, the setting input assist device causes the third video display unit 133 to display an image when the specific paper S reaches the chain 962 of the paper discharge unit 960. In addition, the setting input auxiliary device causes the fourth video display unit 134 to display a video when the specific paper S reaches the paper discharge tray 961 of the paper discharge unit 960.
 これにより、設定入力補助装置は、特定の紙Sの軌跡を追うようにして、第1映像表示部131から第4映像表示部134に紙Sが撮像された映像を表示させることができる。オペレーターは、第1映像表示部131から第4映像表示部134を見ることによって、印刷機本体900による紙Sへの印刷の様子を過去に遡って確認できる。例えば、印刷ジョブを開始した直後に排紙部960に排出された紙Sに不具合が生じたとする。この場合、オペレーターは、紙指定部32に例えば1枚目~20枚目と入力する。すると、印刷機1は、1枚目~20枚目の紙Sが撮像された映像を第1映像表示部131から第4映像表示部134へ表示する。オペレーターは、この映像を確認して、印刷ジョブが開始された直後の紙Sの様子を確認できる。よって、設定入力補助装置は、紙Sが印刷機本体900の各部を走行する際の紙Sの様子をより詳細にオペレーターに提供できる。 Thereby, the setting input auxiliary device can display the image in which the paper S is captured from the first video display unit 131 on the fourth video display unit 134 so as to follow the trajectory of the specific paper S. By viewing the fourth video display unit 134 from the first video display unit 131, the operator can check the state of printing on the paper S by the printer main body 900 retrospectively. For example, it is assumed that a problem has occurred in the paper S discharged to the paper discharge unit 960 immediately after the start of the print job. In this case, the operator inputs, for example, the first to twentieth sheets in the paper designating unit 32. Then, the printing press 1 displays a video image of the first to twentieth paper sheets S from the first video display unit 131 to the fourth video display unit 134. The operator can confirm the state of the paper S immediately after the start of the print job by confirming this video. Therefore, the setting input auxiliary device can provide the operator with the details of the state of the paper S when the paper S travels through each part of the printer main body 900.
 図8は、拡大表示用追跡画面が表示されているときの表示部を模式的に示す構成図である。図7に示す複数列の第1映像表示部131から第4映像表示部134のうちの一列がオペレーターによって選択されると、設定入力補助装置は、図8に示すような拡大表示用追跡画面を表示部120に表示させる。この拡大表示用追跡画面は、全体表示部135と、第1映像表示部131から第4映像表示部134と、備考表示部31と、拡大映像表示部33とが含まれる。なお、備考表示部31は、表示部120に表示されなくてもよい。第1映像表示部131から第4映像表示部134は、例えば、一列に並べられて表示部120に表示される。 FIG. 8 is a configuration diagram schematically showing the display unit when the enlarged display tracking screen is displayed. When an operator selects one of the plurality of first to fourth video display units 134 to 134 shown in FIG. 7, the setting input auxiliary device displays an enlarged display tracking screen as shown in FIG. It is displayed on the display unit 120. This enlarged display tracking screen includes an entire display unit 135, a first video display unit 131 to a fourth video display unit 134, a remarks display unit 31, and an enlarged video display unit 33. Note that the remark display unit 31 may not be displayed on the display unit 120. The first video display unit 131 to the fourth video display unit 134 are displayed on the display unit 120 in a line, for example.
 拡大映像表示部33は、第1映像表示部131から第4映像表示部134に表示されている映像のうちの1つを拡大して表示する部分である。設定入力補助装置は、例えば、図8に示すように、第2映像表示部132がオペレーターによって選択されると、第2映像表示部132に表示されている映像を第2映像表示部132よりも拡大して拡大映像表示部33に表示する。すなわち、拡大表示用追跡画面では、第1映像表示部131から第4映像表示部134の各映像表示部は、いわゆるサムネイルとして機能する。設定入力補助装置は、第1映像表示部131から第4映像表示部134に表示されている映像のうち、オペレーターが所望する映像を拡大して表示部120に表示させることができる。よって、設定入力補助装置は、オペレーターが所望する映像をより見やすくオペレーターに提供できる。 The enlarged video display unit 33 is a part that enlarges and displays one of the videos displayed on the fourth video display unit 134 from the first video display unit 131. For example, as illustrated in FIG. 8, when the second video display unit 132 is selected by the operator, the setting input auxiliary device displays the video displayed on the second video display unit 132 more than the second video display unit 132. The image is enlarged and displayed on the enlarged image display unit 33. That is, on the enlarged display tracking screen, each video display unit from the first video display unit 131 to the fourth video display unit 134 functions as a so-called thumbnail. The setting input auxiliary device can enlarge a video desired by the operator from the first video display unit 131 to the fourth video display unit 134 and display the video on the display unit 120. Therefore, the setting input auxiliary device can provide the operator with an image that the operator desires more easily.
 ここで、本実施形態の設定入力補助装置は、図7及び図8に示す第1映像表示部131から第4映像表示部134のすべてを同時に表示部120に表示させなくてもよい。具体的には、設定入力補助装置は、第1映像表示部131から第4映像表示部134のうちの少なくとも1つを表示部120に表示させる。そして、設定入力補助装置は、紙指定部32で指定された特定の紙Sが撮像された映像を、第1映像表示部131から第4映像表示部134のうち表示部120に表示された映像表示部に表示させる。この場合であっても、設定入力補助装置は、紙Sが印刷機本体900の各部を走行する際の紙Sの様子をより詳細にオペレーターに提供できる。 Here, the setting input auxiliary device of this embodiment may not display all of the first video display unit 131 to the fourth video display unit 134 shown in FIGS. 7 and 8 on the display unit 120 at the same time. Specifically, the setting input auxiliary device causes the display unit 120 to display at least one of the first video display unit 131 to the fourth video display unit 134. Then, the setting input auxiliary device displays the video image of the specific paper S designated by the paper designating unit 32 and the video image displayed on the display unit 120 among the first video display unit 131 to the fourth video display unit 134. Display on the display. Even in this case, the setting input auxiliary device can provide the operator with a more detailed view of the state of the paper S when the paper S travels through each part of the printer main body 900.
 図9は、実施形態2の設定画面が表示されているときの表示部を模式的に示す構成図である。実施形態2の設定入力補助装置は、図9に示す設定画面を表示部120に表示させる。設定画面は、設定操作補助域147と、設定対象映像表示部34と、プリセット選択部40と、登録ボタン41と、読出ボタン42と、候補表示ボタン43と、全体表示ボタン44と、紙サイズ絞込ボタン45と、色数絞込ボタン46と、紙種絞込ボタン47と、紙厚絞込ボタン48と、印刷速度絞込ボタン49と、比較ボタン50とが含まれる。また、設定画面は、全体表示部135と、印刷開始ボタン142と、印刷停止ボタン143と、録画開始ボタン144と、録画停止ボタン145と、録画時間表示部138も含まれる。 FIG. 9 is a configuration diagram schematically showing a display unit when the setting screen of the second embodiment is displayed. The setting input auxiliary device according to the second embodiment displays the setting screen illustrated in FIG. 9 on the display unit 120. The setting screen includes a setting operation auxiliary area 147, a setting target video display unit 34, a preset selection unit 40, a registration button 41, a read button 42, a candidate display button 43, a whole display button 44, a paper size limiter. A narrow button 45, a color number narrow button 46, a paper type narrow button 47, a paper thickness narrow button 48, a print speed narrow button 49, and a comparison button 50 are included. The setting screen also includes an entire display unit 135, a print start button 142, a print stop button 143, a recording start button 144, a recording stop button 145, and a recording time display unit 138.
 設定対象映像表示部34は、プリセット選択部40で選択された設定値で印刷ジョブを実行した際に、各カメラ(図9では、図1に示す第2カメラ152)が撮像した映像を表示する部分である。図5に示す設定対象映像表示部136は設定対象の現在の映像を表示する部分であるのに対して、図9に示す設定対象映像表示部34は設定対象の過去の映像を表示する部分である点で異なる。プリセット選択部40は、複数の設定値を含むリストを表示する部分である。図5に示すプリセット選択部148は各設定値の具体的な値をリストとして表示するのに対し、図9に示すプリセット選択部40は各設定値を登録したときの印刷条件の一部を見出しとして設定値のリストを表示する点で異なる。 The setting target video display unit 34 displays video captured by each camera (in FIG. 9, the second camera 152 shown in FIG. 1) when a print job is executed with the setting value selected by the preset selection unit 40. Part. The setting target video display unit 136 shown in FIG. 5 is a part that displays the current video to be set, whereas the setting target video display unit 34 shown in FIG. 9 is a part that displays the past video to be set. There are some differences. The preset selection unit 40 is a part that displays a list including a plurality of setting values. The preset selection unit 148 shown in FIG. 5 displays specific values of each setting value as a list, whereas the preset selection unit 40 shown in FIG. 9 finds a part of printing conditions when each setting value is registered. Is different in that a list of setting values is displayed.
 登録ボタン41は、設定操作補助域147に入力されている設定値を記憶装置161に格納するためのボタンである。オペレーターによって登録ボタン41が操作されると、記憶装置161は、現在の(今回の印刷ジョブでの)印刷条件と対応付けて設定操作補助域147に入力されている設定値を格納する。なお、設定入力補助装置は、設定画面を表示する前に、印刷条件のうちの一部が印刷ジョブの設定の際に入力されている。印刷条件のうちの一部とは、例えば、紙サイズや、紙厚や、色数である。よって、設定入力補助装置は、登録ボタン41が操作されると、これ以外の印刷条件、具体的には、印刷速度や紙種を新たに入力するようにオペレーターに指示する。オペレーターは、この指示を受けて、印刷速度や紙種を入力する。そして、設定入力補助装置は、これらの印刷条件を設定操作補助域147に入力されている設定値と対応付けて記憶装置161に格納させる。 The registration button 41 is a button for storing the setting value input in the setting operation auxiliary area 147 in the storage device 161. When the registration button 41 is operated by the operator, the storage device 161 stores the setting value input in the setting operation auxiliary area 147 in association with the current printing condition (for the current print job). In the setting input auxiliary device, a part of the printing conditions is input at the time of setting the print job before displaying the setting screen. Some of the printing conditions are, for example, paper size, paper thickness, and number of colors. Therefore, when the registration button 41 is operated, the setting input auxiliary device instructs the operator to newly input other printing conditions, specifically, the printing speed and the paper type. In response to this instruction, the operator inputs the printing speed and paper type. Then, the setting input auxiliary device stores these printing conditions in the storage device 161 in association with the setting values input in the setting operation auxiliary area 147.
 読出ボタン42は、記憶装置161に格納されている設定値をプリセット選択部40に表示させるためのボタンである。候補表示ボタン43は、記憶装置161に格納されているすべての設定値の中から、候補となり得る設定値を検索し、検索で該当した設定値のリストをプリセット選択部40に表示させるためのボタンである。候補表示ボタン43が操作されると、設定入力補助装置は、現在(今回の印刷ジョブで)入力されている印刷条件に基づいて、この印刷条件に近い印刷条件が対応付けられた設定値のリストをプリセット選択部40に表示させる。 The read button 42 is a button for causing the preset selection unit 40 to display the set value stored in the storage device 161. The candidate display button 43 is a button for searching for a setting value that can be a candidate from all the setting values stored in the storage device 161 and causing the preset selection unit 40 to display a list of setting values corresponding to the search. It is. When the candidate display button 43 is operated, the setting input auxiliary device, based on the printing conditions currently input (in the current print job), a list of setting values associated with printing conditions close to the printing conditions. Is displayed on the preset selection unit 40.
 全体表示ボタン44は、記憶装置161に格納されているすべての設定値のリストをプリセット選択部40に表示させるためのボタンである。記憶装置161に格納されている設定値の数が膨大になると、オペレーターはプリセット選択部40から所望する設定値を探し出すことが困難になる。紙サイズ絞込ボタン45から印刷速度絞込ボタン49の各ボタンは、この複数の設定値を、オペレーターが所望する印刷条件で絞り込むためのボタンである。 The whole display button 44 is a button for causing the preset selection unit 40 to display a list of all setting values stored in the storage device 161. When the number of setting values stored in the storage device 161 becomes enormous, it becomes difficult for the operator to find a desired setting value from the preset selection unit 40. Each button from the paper size narrowing down button 45 to the printing speed narrowing down button 49 is a button for narrowing down the plurality of setting values according to printing conditions desired by the operator.
 紙サイズ絞込ボタン45が操作されると、設定入力補助装置は、紙サイズが今回の印刷ジョブで入力されている値と一致する、または、紙サイズが今回の印刷ジョブで入力されている値と類似する設定値をプリセット選択部40に表示させる。あるいは、設定入力補助装置は、紙サイズが現在(今回の印刷ジョブ)の紙サイズと近い順に設定値のリストを並び替える。なお、本実施形態では、紙サイズ絞込ボタン45は、現在の印刷条件での印刷速度を表示するための部分としても機能する。 When the paper size narrowing button 45 is operated, the setting input auxiliary device matches the value entered in the current print job or the paper size entered in the current print job. Is displayed on the preset selection unit 40. Alternatively, the setting input auxiliary device rearranges the list of setting values in the order in which the paper size is closer to the current (current print job) paper size. In the present embodiment, the paper size narrowing button 45 also functions as a part for displaying the printing speed under the current printing conditions.
 色数絞込ボタン46が操作されると、設定入力補助装置は、色数が今回の印刷ジョブで入力されている値と一致する、または、色数が今回の印刷ジョブで入力されている値と類似する設定値をプリセット選択部40に表示させる。あるいは、設定入力補助装置は、色数が現在(今回の印刷ジョブ)の色数と近い順に設定値のリストを並び替える。紙種絞込ボタン47が操作されると、設定入力補助装置は、紙種が今回の印刷ジョブで入力されている値と一致する、または、紙種が今回の印刷ジョブで入力されている値と類似する設定値をプリセット選択部40に表示させる。あるいは、設定入力補助装置は、紙種が現在(今回の印刷ジョブ)の紙種と近い順に設定値のリストを並び替える。 When the color number narrowing button 46 is operated, the setting input auxiliary device matches the value entered in the current print job or the value entered in the current print job. Is displayed on the preset selection unit 40. Alternatively, the setting input auxiliary device rearranges the list of setting values in the order in which the number of colors is closer to the current number of colors (current print job). When the paper type narrowing button 47 is operated, the setting input auxiliary device matches the value that the paper type is input in the current print job or the value that the paper type is input in the current print job. Is displayed on the preset selection unit 40. Alternatively, the setting input auxiliary device rearranges the list of setting values in the order in which the paper type is closest to the current (current print job) paper type.
 紙厚絞込ボタン48が操作されると、設定入力補助装置は、紙厚が今回の印刷ジョブで入力されている値と一致する、または、紙厚が今回の印刷ジョブで入力されている値と類似する設定値をプリセット選択部40に表示させる。あるいは、設定入力補助装置は、紙厚が現在(今回の印刷ジョブ)の紙厚と近い順に設定値のリストを並び替える。印刷速度絞込ボタン49が操作されると、設定入力補助装置は、印刷速度が今回の印刷ジョブで入力されている値と一致する、または、印刷速度が今回の印刷ジョブで入力されている値と類似する設定値をプリセット選択部40に表示させる。あるいは、設定入力補助装置は、印刷速度が現在(今回の印刷ジョブ)の印刷速度と近い順に設定値のリストを並び替える。なお、上述の「類似」とは、今回の印刷ジョブで入力されている値と、記憶装置161が格納する設定値との差異が所定値以内の場合をいう。 When the paper thickness narrowing button 48 is operated, the setting input auxiliary device matches the value that the paper thickness is input in the current print job or the value that the paper thickness is input in the current print job. Is displayed on the preset selection unit 40. Alternatively, the setting input auxiliary device rearranges the list of setting values in the order in which the paper thickness is close to the current paper thickness (current print job). When the print speed narrowing button 49 is operated, the setting input auxiliary device determines that the print speed matches the value input in the current print job or the print speed is input in the current print job. Is displayed on the preset selection unit 40. Alternatively, the setting input auxiliary device sorts the list of setting values in the order in which the printing speed is close to the current printing speed (current print job). The “similarity” described above refers to a case where a difference between a value input in the current print job and a set value stored in the storage device 161 is within a predetermined value.
 設定画面の一例として、図9では、設定入力補助装置は、紙サイズが969mm×636mmで登録されている設定値のリストをプリセット選択部40に表示させている。オペレーターは、プリセット選択部40に表示された各設定値の見出しを見て、現在の印刷条件と同一、または、類似する設定値を探す。図9では、各設定値の見出しは、紙種及び印刷速度である。設定入力補助装置は、この見出しを紙種及び印刷速度以外の印刷条件に変更できてもよい。この場合、設定入力補助装置は、見出しを選択するためのボタンを表示部120に表示させる。オペレーターは、このボタンを操作して、プリセット選択部40に表示される設定値の見出しを変更する。これにより、設定入力補助装置を用いれば、オペレーターは、所望する設定値をより容易に探し出せる。 As an example of the setting screen, in FIG. 9, the setting input auxiliary device displays a list of setting values registered with a paper size of 969 mm × 636 mm on the preset selection unit 40. The operator looks at the heading of each setting value displayed on the preset selection unit 40 and searches for a setting value that is the same as or similar to the current printing condition. In FIG. 9, the headings of the setting values are the paper type and the printing speed. The setting input auxiliary device may be able to change the heading to a printing condition other than the paper type and the printing speed. In this case, the setting input auxiliary device causes the display unit 120 to display a button for selecting a heading. The operator operates this button to change the heading of the setting value displayed on the preset selection unit 40. Thereby, if the setting input auxiliary device is used, the operator can more easily find a desired setting value.
 図10は、実施形態2の設定画面に備考表示部が表示されているときの表示部を模式的に示す構成図である。オペレーターは、図9に示すプリセット選択部40に表示される設定値のリストを見て、複数の設定値の中から1つの設定値を選択する。すると、設定入力補助装置は、例えば、選択された設定値を設定操作補助域147に反映させる。そして、設定入力補助装置は、図10に示すように、備考表示部31を表示部120に表示させると共に、その設定値が登録された印刷ジョブで撮像された映像を設定対象映像表示部34に表示させる。例えば図10に示す設定画面は、図1に示す反転部950に設けられる反転部用第1空気噴出装置181から反転部用第4空気噴出装置184の設定を行う画面である。よって、設定入力補助装置は、第2カメラ152が撮像した映像を設定対象映像表示部34に表示させる。 FIG. 10 is a configuration diagram schematically showing the display unit when the remarks display unit is displayed on the setting screen of the second embodiment. The operator looks at a list of setting values displayed on the preset selection unit 40 shown in FIG. 9 and selects one setting value from a plurality of setting values. Then, the setting input auxiliary device reflects the selected setting value in the setting operation auxiliary area 147, for example. Then, as shown in FIG. 10, the setting input auxiliary device causes the remark display unit 31 to be displayed on the display unit 120, and the video captured by the print job in which the setting value is registered is displayed on the setting target video display unit 34. Display. For example, the setting screen shown in FIG. 10 is a screen for setting from the first air ejecting device for reversing unit 181 to the fourth air ejecting device for reversing unit 184 provided in the reversing unit 950 shown in FIG. Therefore, the setting input auxiliary device displays the video captured by the second camera 152 on the setting target video display unit 34.
 オペレーターは、図10に示す備考表示部31と、設定対象映像表示部34とを見て、その設定値での紙Sへの印刷が良好か否か、具体的には、紙Sのバタつきを良好に抑制できているか否かを判定する。設定入力補助装置は、他の設定値が選択されると、備考表示部31にその設定値の詳細情報を表示すると共に、その設定値で印刷ジョブを実行した際に撮像された映像を設定対象映像表示部34に表示させる。これにより、設定入力補助装置を用いれば、オペレーターは、より容易に良好な設定値を探し出せる。 The operator looks at the remark display unit 31 and the setting target video display unit 34 shown in FIG. 10 and determines whether or not the printing on the paper S with the set values is good. It is determined whether or not it can be suppressed satisfactorily. When another setting value is selected, the setting input auxiliary device displays detailed information of the setting value on the remark display unit 31 and sets the image captured when the print job is executed with the setting value as a setting target. It is displayed on the video display unit 34. Thereby, if a setting input auxiliary device is used, an operator can find a good set value more easily.
 図11は、比較設定画面が表示されているときの表示部を模式的に示す構成図である。設定入力補助装置は、例えば、図10に示す比較ボタン50が操作されると、表示部120に表示させる画面を図11に示す比較設定画面に切り替える。比較設定画面は、設定対象映像表示部136と、設定対象映像表示部34と、設定操作補助域147とが含まれる。また、比較設定画面は、全体表示部135と、印刷開始ボタン142と、印刷停止ボタン143と、録画開始ボタン144と、録画停止ボタン145と、録画時間表示部138も含まれる。 FIG. 11 is a configuration diagram schematically showing the display unit when the comparison setting screen is displayed. For example, when the comparison button 50 shown in FIG. 10 is operated, the setting input auxiliary device switches the screen displayed on the display unit 120 to the comparison setting screen shown in FIG. The comparison setting screen includes a setting target video display unit 136, a setting target video display unit 34, and a setting operation auxiliary area 147. The comparison setting screen also includes an entire display unit 135, a print start button 142, a print stop button 143, a recording start button 144, a recording stop button 145, and a recording time display unit 138.
 設定入力補助装置は、現在の設定対象を各カメラが撮像した映像を設定対象映像表示部136に表示させる。また、設定入力補助装置は、図9で選択された設定値で印刷ジョブを実行した時の設定対象を各カメラが撮像した映像を設定対象映像表示部34に表示させる。なお、図9及び図10に示す設定操作補助域147と、図11に示す設定操作補助域147では形状が異なるが、実現する機能は同一である。 The setting input auxiliary device causes the setting target video display unit 136 to display a video captured by each camera of the current setting target. Further, the setting input auxiliary device causes the setting target video display unit 34 to display a video obtained by each camera capturing the setting target when the print job is executed with the setting value selected in FIG. The setting operation auxiliary area 147 shown in FIGS. 9 and 10 and the setting operation auxiliary area 147 shown in FIG. 11 have different shapes, but the functions to be realized are the same.
 オペレーターは、図9に示すプリセット選択部40で選択した設定値で印刷ジョブを実行した時の映像を設定対象映像表示部34で確認しながら、設定操作補助域147を操作する。ここで、オペレーターによる設定操作補助域147の操作に応じて、設定対象映像表示部136が表示する映像は変化する。オペレーターは、設定対象映像表示部136に表示される映像が、設定対象映像表示部34に表示される映像よりも良好な映像(紙Sのバタつきを低減できている映像)となるように、設定操作補助域147を操作する。これにより、設定入力補助装置を用いれば、オペレーターはより容易に良好な設定値を探し出せる。 The operator operates the setting operation auxiliary area 147 while confirming the image when the print job is executed with the setting value selected by the preset selection unit 40 shown in FIG. Here, the video displayed by the setting target video display unit 136 changes according to the operation of the setting operation auxiliary area 147 by the operator. The operator can make the video displayed on the setting target video display unit 136 better than the video displayed on the setting target video display unit 34 (video that can reduce the flutter of the paper S). The setting operation auxiliary area 147 is operated. Thereby, if a setting input auxiliary device is used, an operator can find out a good setting value more easily.
 ここで、実施形態1の設定入力補助装置100及び実施形態2の設定入力補助装置は、表示部120に表示させる映像が動画である場合、映像を1以下の倍速で表示部120に表示させることができると好ましい。すなわち、設定入力補助装置は、動画をスローで表示部120に表示させることができると好ましい。1倍速で動画を表示部120に表示させると、印刷速度によっては、オペレーターは、紙Sのバタつきを目視で確認することが困難となる場合がある。よって、この場合、設定入力補助装置は、1未満の倍速で映像を表示部120に表示させる。これにより、設定入力補助装置を用いれば、オペレーターは、紙Sのバタつきを確認しやすくなる。 Here, when the video displayed on the display unit 120 is a moving image, the setting input auxiliary device 100 according to the first embodiment and the setting input auxiliary device according to the second embodiment display the video on the display unit 120 at a speed of 1 or less. Is preferable. That is, it is preferable that the setting input auxiliary device can display the moving image on the display unit 120 in a slow manner. When the moving image is displayed on the display unit 120 at 1 × speed, it may be difficult for the operator to visually confirm the fluttering of the paper S depending on the printing speed. Therefore, in this case, the setting input auxiliary device causes the display unit 120 to display the video at a speed less than 1. Thereby, if the setting input auxiliary device is used, the operator can easily check the fluttering of the paper S.
 また、実施形態1及び実施形態2のカメラは、1つの設定対象に、複数設けられると好ましい。この場合、設定入力補助装置は、複数のカメラから1つの設定対象の映像を取得することで、1つの設定対象の映像を複数取得できる。そして、設定入力補助装置は、この複数の映像を表示部120に同時に表示させたり、複数の映像を表示部120に切り替えて表示させたりする。これにより、設定入力補助装置は、より広範囲な設定対象の映像を表示部120に表示させることができる。結果として、設定入力補助装置を用いれば、オペレーターは、より広範囲にわたって設定対象の様子を確認できる。 In addition, it is preferable that a plurality of cameras according to the first and second embodiments are provided for one setting target. In this case, the setting input auxiliary device can acquire a plurality of one setting target video by acquiring one setting target video from a plurality of cameras. Then, the setting input auxiliary device displays the plurality of videos on the display unit 120 at the same time, or switches the plurality of videos to the display unit 120 for display. As a result, the setting input auxiliary device can display a wider range of setting target images on the display unit 120. As a result, if the setting input auxiliary device is used, the operator can confirm the state of the setting target over a wider range.
 また、実施形態1及び実施形態2のカメラは、設定対象を拡大または縮小して撮像できると好ましい。すなわち、カメラは、ズーム機能を有すると好ましい。設定入力補助装置は、カメラに設定対象を拡大して撮像させることにより、設定対象のより詳細な部分を示す映像をカメラから取得できる。この映像を表示部120に表示させることにより、設定入力補助装置は、設定対象のより詳細な部分を映像としてオペレーターに提供できる。また、設定入力補助装置は、カメラに設定対象を縮小して撮像させることにより、設定対象のより広範囲を示す映像をカメラから取得できる。この映像を表示部120に表示させることにより、設定入力補助装置は、設定対象のより広範囲を映像としてオペレーターに提供できる。 In addition, it is preferable that the cameras of the first and second embodiments can capture images by enlarging or reducing the setting target. That is, the camera preferably has a zoom function. The setting input auxiliary device can acquire an image showing a more detailed portion of the setting target from the camera by causing the camera to magnify and image the setting target. By displaying this video on the display unit 120, the setting input auxiliary device can provide the operator with a more detailed portion to be set as a video. The setting input auxiliary device can acquire an image showing a wider range of the setting target from the camera by causing the camera to reduce the setting target and capture an image. By displaying this video on the display unit 120, the setting input auxiliary device can provide the operator with a wider range of the setting target as the video.
 また、カメラは、設定対象に対して回動または移動できると好ましい。すなわち、カメラは、首振り機構や、スライド機構を介して印刷機本体900に設けられると好ましい。設定入力補助装置は、この首振り機構の動作や、スライド機構の動作を制御する。これにより、設定入力補助装置は、1つのカメラから、設定対象のより広範囲を示す映像を取得できる。この映像を表示部120に表示させることにより、設定入力補助装置は、設定対象のより広範囲を映像としてオペレーターに提供できる。なお、以下の説明では、カメラは、首振り機構を介して印刷機本体900に設けられる場合を説明する。 Also, it is preferable that the camera can be rotated or moved with respect to the setting target. That is, it is preferable that the camera is provided in the printing press main body 900 via a swing mechanism or a slide mechanism. The setting input auxiliary device controls the operation of the swing mechanism and the operation of the slide mechanism. Thereby, the setting input auxiliary device can acquire an image showing a wider range of the setting target from one camera. By displaying this video on the display unit 120, the setting input auxiliary device can provide the operator with a wider range of the setting target as the video. In the following description, a case will be described in which the camera is provided in the printing press main body 900 via a swing mechanism.
 図12は、カメラ制御画面が表示されているときの表示部を模式的に示す構成図である。設定入力補助装置は、例えば、図12に示すようなカメラ制御画面を表示部120に表示させる。カメラ制御画面には、映像表示部51と、カメラ切替ボタン52と、パン/チルト切替ボタン53と、回動ボタン54とが含まれる。映像表示部51は、各カメラが現在撮像している映像を表示する部分である。カメラ切替ボタン52は、第1カメラ151から第4カメラ154の中から1つのカメラを選択するためのボタンである。カメラ切替ボタン52が操作されると、設定入力補助装置は、首振り機構の制御対象を、カメラ切替ボタン52で選択されたカメラに切り替える。また、設定入力補助装置は、映像表示部51に表示させる映像を、カメラ切替ボタン52で選択されたカメラが撮像した映像に切り替える。 FIG. 12 is a configuration diagram schematically showing the display unit when the camera control screen is displayed. For example, the setting input auxiliary device displays a camera control screen as shown in FIG. The camera control screen includes a video display unit 51, a camera switching button 52, a pan / tilt switching button 53, and a rotation button 54. The video display unit 51 is a part that displays a video currently captured by each camera. The camera switching button 52 is a button for selecting one camera from the first camera 151 to the fourth camera 154. When the camera switching button 52 is operated, the setting input auxiliary device switches the control target of the swing mechanism to the camera selected by the camera switching button 52. In addition, the setting input auxiliary device switches the video to be displayed on the video display unit 51 to the video captured by the camera selected by the camera switching button 52.
 パン/チルト切替ボタン53及び回動ボタン54は、カメラ切替ボタン52で選択されているカメラを回動させるためのボタンである。さらに具体的には、パン/チルト切替ボタン53は、各カメラの回動方向を切り替えるためのボタンである。回動ボタン54は、各カメラを回動させる角度を調節するためのボタンである。設定入力補助装置は、回動ボタン54が操作されると、パン/チルト切替ボタン53で選択されている方向に、回動ボタン54で指定された角度分、カメラ切替ボタン52で選択されているカメラを回動させる。 The pan / tilt switching button 53 and the rotation button 54 are buttons for rotating the camera selected by the camera switching button 52. More specifically, the pan / tilt switching button 53 is a button for switching the rotation direction of each camera. The rotation button 54 is a button for adjusting the angle at which each camera is rotated. When the rotation button 54 is operated, the setting input auxiliary device is selected by the camera switching button 52 in the direction selected by the pan / tilt switching button 53 by the angle specified by the rotation button 54. Rotate the camera.
 ここで、設定入力補助装置は、各カメラの撮像方向を記憶装置161にあらかじめ格納させておくと好ましい。撮像方向とは、設定対象に対するカメラの角度である。この場合、設定入力補助装置は、例えば、カメラ制御画面に登録ボタン55を表示させる。設定入力補助装置は、登録ボタン55が操作されると、現在、カメラ切替ボタン52で選択されているカメラの撮像方向を記憶装置161に格納させる。設定入力補助装置は、オペレーターがカメラの首振り機構を制御する際に、記憶装置161に格納されている複数の撮像方向を取得する。そして、設定入力補助装置は、現在のカメラの撮像方向を、記憶装置161から取得した撮像方向と一致するように、首振り機構の動作を制御する。これにより、設定入力補助装置は、カメラの首振り機構の動作を制御する際のオペレーターの作業量を低減できる。 Here, it is preferable that the setting input auxiliary device stores the imaging direction of each camera in the storage device 161 in advance. The imaging direction is the angle of the camera with respect to the setting target. In this case, the setting input auxiliary device displays the registration button 55 on the camera control screen, for example. When the registration button 55 is operated, the setting input auxiliary device stores the imaging direction of the camera currently selected by the camera switching button 52 in the storage device 161. The setting input auxiliary device acquires a plurality of imaging directions stored in the storage device 161 when the operator controls the camera swing mechanism. Then, the setting input auxiliary device controls the operation of the swing mechanism so that the current imaging direction of the camera matches the imaging direction acquired from the storage device 161. Thereby, the setting input auxiliary device can reduce an operator's work amount when controlling the operation of the camera swing mechanism.
 ここで、固定型のカメラは、首振り機構やスライド機構を有するカメラよりも安価である。よって、設定入力補助装置は、安価である固定型のカメラを1つの設定対象に複数設けられることで、印刷機1の製造に要するコストを低減できる。一方、首振り機構やスライド機構を有するカメラは、固定型のカメラよりも、設定対象の広範囲を撮像できる。よって、設定入力補助装置は、設定対象の広範囲をオペレーターに映像として提供するために必要なカメラの数を低減できる。結果として、設定入力補助装置は、印刷機1の構造をシンプルにできる可能性や、印刷機1の大きさを低減できる可能性がある。 Here, a fixed camera is less expensive than a camera having a swing mechanism or a slide mechanism. Therefore, the setting input auxiliary device can reduce the cost required for manufacturing the printing press 1 by providing a plurality of inexpensive fixed cameras for one setting target. On the other hand, a camera having a swing mechanism or a slide mechanism can capture a wider range of setting objects than a fixed camera. Therefore, the setting input auxiliary device can reduce the number of cameras necessary for providing a wide range of setting objects to the operator as an image. As a result, the setting input auxiliary device may be able to simplify the structure of the printing press 1 and may reduce the size of the printing press 1.
(付記項1)
 被記録媒体に印刷を施す印刷機本体に設けられて、前記印刷機本体を構成する一部である設定対象を撮像するカメラと、
 前記設定対象を制御するために必要な情報を表示する少なくとも1つの表示部と、
 が接続される設定入力補助装置であって、
 前記設定入力補助装置は、
 前記設定対象の設定をこれから開始する操作を補助する画像が表示される設定開始操作補助域を前記表示部に表示し、
 前記設定対象の設定をこれから開始する操作に基づいて、
 前記設定対象の映像と、
 前記設定対象を制御するための設定値の入力を補助する画像を表示する設定操作補助域と、
 を前記表示部に表示することを特徴とする設定入力補助装置。
(付記項2)
 前記設定入力補助装置は、
 前記設定対象の設定をこれから開始する操作がなされると、設定操作開始信号を取得し、
 前記設定操作開始信号を取得すると、
 前記設定対象の映像と、
 前記設定操作補助域と、
 を前記表示部に表示することを特徴とする付記項1に記載の設定入力補助装置。
(付記項3)
 前記設定対象は複数存在し、
 前記カメラは、複数の前記設定対象にそれぞれ設けられ、
 前記複数の前記設定対象のうちの1つである特定設定対象の設定をこれから開始する際に取得する信号であって、前記設定操作開始信号の1つである特定設定操作開始信号を取得すると、
 前記特定設定対象の映像と、
 前記設定操作補助域として、前記特定設定対象を制御するための設定値の入力を補助する画像を表示する特定設定操作補助域と、
 を前記表示部に表示することを特徴とする付記項2に記載の設定入力補助装置。
(付記項4)
 前記設定操作開始信号を取得すると、
 あらかじめ設定された前記設定値を選択する部分であるプリセット選択部を前記表示部に表示することを特徴とする付記項2または付記項3に記載の設定入力補助装置。
(付記項5)
 前記カメラが撮像した映像を記憶する記憶手段を備え、
 前記プリセット選択部に表示されている前記設定値のリストのうちの特定の設定値が選択されると、選択された設定値で被記録媒体が前記印刷機本体を走行した際に前記カメラが撮像した映像を、前記記憶手段から取得して前記表示部に表示させることを特徴とする付記項4に記載の設定入力補助装置。
(付記項6)
 前記記憶手段は、複数の被記録媒体が順次走行する様子が撮像された映像から、特定の被記録媒体が撮像された部分を抽出するための特定情報を格納することを特徴とする付記項5に記載の設定入力補助装置。
(付記項7)
 前記複数の被記録媒体の中から特定の被記録媒体を指定する操作がなされると、前記特定情報に基づいて、前記カメラが撮像した映像から前記特定の被記録媒体が撮像された部分を抽出し、前記特定の被記録媒体が撮像された部分の映像を前記表示部に表示させることを特徴とする付記項6に記載の設定入力補助装置。
(付記項8)
 前記カメラが複数設けられ、
 前記複数の被記録媒体の中から特定の被記録媒体を指定する操作がなされると、前記特定情報に基づいて、前記カメラが撮像した映像から前記特定の被記録媒体が撮像された部分を前記カメラ毎に特定し、前記特定の被記録媒体が撮像された部分の映像を前記カメラ毎に前記表示部に表示させることを特徴とする付記項7に記載の設定入力補助装置。
(付記項9)
 前記特定の被記録媒体が撮像された部分の映像を前記表示部に表示させる際、前記特定の被記録媒体が撮像された時の印刷条件を前記表示部に表示させることを特徴とする付記項7または付記項8に記載の設定入力補助装置。
(付記項10)
 前記選択された設定値で被記録媒体が前記印刷機本体を走行した際に前記カメラが撮像した映像と共に、前記カメラが現在撮像している映像を前記表示部に表示させることを特徴とする付記項5から付記項9のいずれか一項に記載の設定入力補助装置。
(付記項11)
 前記プリセット選択部に表示される前記リストに含まれる複数の前記設定値を印刷条件に基づいて並べ替えて前記表示部に表示させることと、
 前記複数の前記設定値に対して前記印刷条件で絞り込み検索を行い、前記絞り込み検索で該当した設定値を前記表示部に表示させることと、
 のうちの少なくとも1つを実行することを特徴とする付記項4から付記項10のいずれか一項に記載の設定入力補助装置。
(付記項12)
 前記印刷条件は、被記録媒体が前記印刷機本体を走行する速度と、前記被記録媒体の平面寸法と、前記被記録媒体の厚さと、前記被記録媒体の種類と、前記印刷機本体が前記被記録媒体に印刷を施す際に用いられる色数と、のうちの少なくとも1つであることを特徴とする付記項11に記載の設定入力補助装置。
(付記項13)
 前記カメラが撮像した映像のうちの少なくとも一部を、前記設定入力補助装置が接続される通信回線を介して前記設定入力補助装置の外部に提供することを特徴とする付記項2から付記項12のいずれか一項に記載の設定入力補助装置。
(付記項14)
 前記印刷機本体を構成し、前記被記録媒体に印刷を施す印刷部は、
 前記被記録媒体の被記録面を反転させる反転部と、
 前記反転部を走行する前記被記録媒体に向かって空気を噴出する反転部用空気噴出装置と、
 を含んで構成され、
 前記カメラは、反転部の部分のうち、前記反転部用空気噴出装置が噴出する前記空気が導かれる部分を撮像し、
 前記設定入力補助装置は、前記反転部用空気噴出装置が噴出する前記空気の流量を調節するための信号であって、前記設定操作開始信号の1つである反転部用空気噴出装置設定操作信号を取得すると、
 前記反転部用空気噴出装置が噴出する前記空気が導かれる部分の映像と、
 前記反転部用空気噴出装置を制御して前記流量を調節するための設定値を入力する部分である流量設定用の前記設定操作補助域と、
 を前記表示部に表示することを特徴とする付記項2から付記項13のいずれか一項に記載の設定入力補助装置。
(付記項15)
 前記カメラが撮像した映像を、1以下の倍速で前記表示部に表示させることを特徴とする付記項1から付記項14のいずれか一項に記載の設定入力補助装置。
(付記項16)
 前記カメラは、1つの前記設定対象に、複数設けられることを特徴とする付記項1から付記項15のいずれか一項に記載の設定入力補助装置。
(付記項17)
 前記カメラは、前記設定対象を拡大または縮小して撮像できることを特徴とする付記項1から付記項16のいずれか一項に記載の設定入力補助装置。
(付記項18)
 前記カメラは、前記設定対象に対して回動または移動できることを特徴とする付記項1から付記項17のいずれか一項に記載の設定入力補助装置。
(Additional item 1)
A camera that is provided in a printer main body that performs printing on a recording medium and that captures a setting target that is a part of the printer main body;
At least one display unit for displaying information necessary for controlling the setting target;
Is a setting input auxiliary device to which
The setting input auxiliary device is
A setting start operation auxiliary area in which an image for assisting an operation of starting the setting target setting is displayed is displayed on the display unit;
Based on the operation to start the setting target setting,
The video to be set;
A setting operation auxiliary area for displaying an image for assisting input of a setting value for controlling the setting object;
Is displayed on the display unit.
(Appendix 2)
The setting input auxiliary device is
When an operation to start setting of the setting target is performed, a setting operation start signal is acquired,
When obtaining the setting operation start signal,
The video to be set;
The setting operation auxiliary area;
Is displayed on the display unit, The setting input assisting device according to additional item 1.
(Additional Item 3)
There are a plurality of the setting targets,
The camera is provided for each of the plurality of setting objects,
When acquiring a specific setting operation start signal that is one of the setting operation start signals, a signal that is acquired when the setting of a specific setting target that is one of the plurality of setting objects is started from now on,
The specific setting target video;
As the setting operation auxiliary area, a specific setting operation auxiliary area for displaying an image for assisting input of a setting value for controlling the specific setting object;
Is displayed on the display unit, The setting input auxiliary device according to item 2, wherein:
(Appendix 4)
When obtaining the setting operation start signal,
4. The setting input auxiliary device according to claim 2 or 3, wherein a preset selection unit that is a part for selecting the setting value set in advance is displayed on the display unit.
(Appendix 5)
Comprising storage means for storing video captured by the camera;
When a specific setting value is selected from the list of setting values displayed in the preset selection unit, the camera captures an image when the recording medium travels through the printer body with the selected setting value. The setting input assisting device according to claim 4, wherein the obtained video is acquired from the storage unit and displayed on the display unit.
(Appendix 6)
Item 5. The storage unit stores specific information for extracting a portion where a specific recording medium is imaged from an image where a plurality of recording media are sequentially traveling. The setting input auxiliary device described in 1.
(Appendix 7)
When an operation for designating a specific recording medium from among the plurality of recording media is performed, a portion where the specific recording medium is imaged is extracted from an image captured by the camera based on the specific information. The setting input assisting device according to appendix 6, wherein an image of a portion where the specific recording medium is imaged is displayed on the display unit.
(Appendix 8)
A plurality of the cameras are provided,
When an operation for designating a specific recording medium from among the plurality of recording media is performed, based on the specific information, a portion where the specific recording medium is imaged from an image captured by the camera is selected. The setting input assisting device according to claim 7, wherein the setting input assisting device is specified for each camera, and an image of a portion of the specific recording medium captured is displayed on the display unit for each camera.
(Appendix 9)
When the video of the part where the specific recording medium is imaged is displayed on the display unit, the printing condition when the specific recording medium is imaged is displayed on the display unit. 7. A setting input auxiliary device according to item 7 or appendix 8.
(Appendix 10)
A supplementary note that causes the display unit to display an image currently captured by the camera together with an image captured by the camera when the recording medium travels through the printing press main body with the selected setting value. Item 10. The setting input auxiliary device according to any one of Items 5 to 9,
(Appendix 11)
Rearranging a plurality of the setting values included in the list displayed in the preset selection unit based on printing conditions and displaying them on the display unit;
Performing a refinement search with the printing conditions for the plurality of the set values, and displaying the set value corresponding to the refinement search on the display unit;
The setting input auxiliary device according to any one of Supplementary Item 4 to Supplementary Item 10, wherein at least one of the above is executed.
(Appendix 12)
The printing conditions include the speed at which the recording medium travels through the printing machine body, the planar dimensions of the recording medium, the thickness of the recording medium, the type of the recording medium, and the printing machine body Item 13. The setting input auxiliary device according to Item 11, which is at least one of the number of colors used when printing on the recording medium.
(Appendix 13)
Item 2 to Item 12, wherein at least a part of an image captured by the camera is provided to the outside of the setting input auxiliary device via a communication line to which the setting input auxiliary device is connected. The setting input auxiliary device according to any one of the above.
(Appendix 14)
A printing unit that constitutes the printing machine main body and performs printing on the recording medium,
A reversing unit for reversing the recording surface of the recording medium;
A reversing part air ejecting device that ejects air toward the recording medium traveling through the reversing part;
Comprising
The camera images a portion of the reversing portion from which the air ejected by the reversing portion air ejection device is guided,
The setting input auxiliary device is a signal for adjusting the flow rate of the air ejected by the reversing unit air ejection device, and is one of the setting operation start signals. Get
An image of a portion of the air guided by the reversing unit air ejection device;
The setting operation auxiliary area for flow rate setting, which is a part for inputting a set value for adjusting the flow rate by controlling the air jet device for the reversing unit,
Is displayed on the display unit, The setting input assisting device according to any one of the supplementary items 2 to 13.
(Appendix 15)
The setting input assisting device according to any one of appendices 1 to 14, wherein an image captured by the camera is displayed on the display unit at a double speed of 1 or less.
(Appendix 16)
The setting input assisting device according to any one of appendices 1 to 15, wherein a plurality of the cameras are provided for one setting target.
(Appendix 17)
The setting input auxiliary device according to any one of Supplementary Note 1 to Supplementary Note 16, wherein the camera can capture an image by enlarging or reducing the setting target.
(Appendix 18)
The setting input auxiliary device according to any one of appendices 1 to 17, wherein the camera can be rotated or moved with respect to the setting target.
(実施形態3)
 実施形態3の印刷機3は、図1に示す印刷機本体900と、印刷機制御装置400とを含んで構成される。印刷機制御装置400は、コンピューターを含んで構成されて印刷機本体900の各部を制御する。印刷機制御装置400は、例えば、給紙部910と、印刷部930と、反転部950と、排紙部960と電気的に接続される。印刷機制御装置400は、これにより、印刷機本体900の各部を制御する。
(Embodiment 3)
The printing machine 3 according to the third embodiment is configured to include the printing machine main body 900 shown in FIG. The printing press control apparatus 400 includes a computer and controls each part of the printing press main body 900. The printing press control apparatus 400 is electrically connected to, for example, a paper feeding unit 910, a printing unit 930, a reversing unit 950, and a paper discharge unit 960. Thus, the printing press control apparatus 400 controls each unit of the printing press main body 900.
 また、印刷機制御装置400は、印刷機本体モニター装置300を含んで構成される。なお、本実施形態では、印刷機本体モニター装置300は、印刷機制御装置400の一部として印刷機制御装置400に組み込まれて構成される。つまり、印刷機本体モニター装置300が備える構成は、印刷機制御装置400が備えている構成でもあり、印刷機本体モニター装置300が実行する手順は、印刷機制御装置400が実行する手順でもある。なお、印刷機本体モニター装置300は、印刷機制御装置400に組み込まれずに、印刷機制御装置400とは別個に設けられる構成であってもよい。 Further, the printing press control device 400 is configured to include a printing press main body monitoring device 300. In the present embodiment, the printing press main body monitoring device 300 is configured to be incorporated in the printing press control device 400 as a part of the printing press control device 400. That is, the configuration included in the printing press main body monitoring apparatus 300 is also the configuration included in the printing press control apparatus 400, and the procedure executed by the printing press main body monitoring apparatus 300 is also the procedure executed by the printing press control apparatus 400. Note that the printing press main body monitoring device 300 may be provided separately from the printing press control device 400 without being incorporated in the printing press control device 400.
 また、印刷機本体モニター装置300は、実施形態1または実施形態2の設定入力補助装置100を含む。よって、本実施形態の印刷機本体モニター装置300は、実施形態1または実施形態2の設定入力補助装置100が奏する効果と同様の効果を奏する。以下、実施形態1または実施形態2と同様の機能を有する要素には、実施形態1または実施形態2の各要素と同じ符号を付して説明を省略する。 Further, the printing press main body monitor device 300 includes the setting input auxiliary device 100 of the first or second embodiment. Therefore, the printing press main body monitor device 300 of the present embodiment has the same effect as the effect of the setting input auxiliary device 100 of the first or second embodiment. Hereinafter, elements having the same functions as those in the first or second embodiment are denoted by the same reference numerals as those in the first or second embodiment, and description thereof is omitted.
 印刷機本体モニター装置300は、入力部110と、表示部120と、撮像部150とが接続されて構成される。 The printing press main body monitor device 300 is configured by connecting an input unit 110, a display unit 120, and an imaging unit 150.
 ここで、印刷機本体モニター装置300は、撮像部150から取得した各映像のうち、特定の映像を、他の映像よりも強調して表示部120に表示する点に特徴がある。以下に、印刷機本体モニター装置300が、どのようにして、特定の映像を他の映像よりも強調して表示部120に表示するのかを説明する。 Here, the printing press main body monitor device 300 is characterized in that a specific video out of each video acquired from the imaging unit 150 is displayed on the display unit 120 with emphasis over other video. Hereinafter, how the printing press main body monitoring apparatus 300 displays a specific image on the display unit 120 with emphasis over other images will be described.
 図13は、4画面表示時の表示部を模式的に示す構成図である。図13に示すように、印刷機本体モニター装置300は、表示部120に、例えば、第1映像表示部331と、第2映像表示部332と、第3映像表示部333と、第4映像表示部334と、全体表示部135とを表示する。 FIG. 13 is a configuration diagram schematically showing a display unit when displaying four screens. As shown in FIG. 13, the printing press main body monitor 300 displays, on the display unit 120, for example, a first video display unit 331, a second video display unit 332, a third video display unit 333, and a fourth video display. The part 334 and the whole display part 135 are displayed.
 印刷機本体モニター装置300は、第1映像表示部331に、例えば、図1に示す第1カメラ151が撮像した給紙部910の映像を表示する。また、印刷機本体モニター装置300は、第2映像表示部332に、例えば、図1に示す第2カメラ152が撮像した反転部950の映像を表示する。 The printing press main body monitor device 300 displays, for example, an image of the paper feeding unit 910 captured by the first camera 151 illustrated in FIG. 1 on the first video display unit 331. Further, the printing press main body monitor device 300 displays, for example, the video of the reversing unit 950 captured by the second camera 152 illustrated in FIG. 1 on the second video display unit 332.
 また、印刷機本体モニター装置300は、第3映像表示部333に、例えば、図1に示す第3カメラ153が撮像した排紙部960の映像その1を表示する。また、印刷機本体モニター装置300は、第4映像表示部334に、例えば、図1に示す第4カメラ154が撮像した排紙部960の映像その2を表示する。 Further, the printing press main body monitor device 300 displays, on the third video display unit 333, for example, the video 1 of the paper discharge unit 960 captured by the third camera 153 shown in FIG. In addition, the printing press main body monitor 300 displays, on the fourth video display unit 334, for example, the video 2 of the paper discharge unit 960 captured by the fourth camera 154 shown in FIG.
 ここで、印刷機本体モニター装置300は、例えば、オペレーターが全体表示部135の丸印を選択したり、印刷機本体モニター装置300が所定の各種信号を取得したりすると、オペレーターが全体表示部135で選択した丸印に対応した映像や、印刷機本体モニター装置300が取得した各種信号に対応した映像を強調して表示する。 Here, for example, when the operator selects a circle on the whole display unit 135 or the printing machine main unit monitor device 300 acquires predetermined various signals, the operator displays the whole display unit 135. The video corresponding to the circle selected in step S1 and the video corresponding to various signals acquired by the printing press main body monitor apparatus 300 are highlighted and displayed.
 ここで、各種信号とは、印刷機本体900の現在の状態を示す信号、または、印刷機本体900を制御するための信号である。以下に、印刷機本体モニター装置300が映像を強調して表示部120に表示する例を説明する。 Here, the various signals are signals indicating the current state of the printing press main body 900 or signals for controlling the printing press main body 900. Hereinafter, an example in which the printing press main body monitor apparatus 300 emphasizes an image and displays it on the display unit 120 will be described.
 図14は、1画面表示時の表示部を模式的に示す構成図である。例えば、オペレーターが給紙部910の丸印を選択すると、図14に示すように、表示部120に拡大表示部336が表示される。拡大表示部336は、図13に示す第1映像表示部331から第4映像表示部334よりも面積が大きい表示部である。 FIG. 14 is a configuration diagram schematically showing a display unit when one screen is displayed. For example, when the operator selects a circle on the paper feed unit 910, an enlarged display unit 336 is displayed on the display unit 120 as shown in FIG. The enlarged display unit 336 is a display unit having a larger area than the first video display unit 331 to the fourth video display unit 334 shown in FIG.
 また、この時、図14に示すように、印刷機本体モニター装置300は、表示部120に第1映像表示部331から第4映像表示部334は表示させずに、拡大表示部336を表示部120の表示域全体に拡大して表示する。 At this time, as shown in FIG. 14, the printing press main body monitoring apparatus 300 does not display the first video display unit 331 to the fourth video display unit 334 on the display unit 120, and displays the enlarged display unit 336 on the display unit. The entire display area of 120 is enlarged and displayed.
 印刷機本体モニター装置300は、図13に示すように第1映像表示部331から第4映像表示部334が表示されている画面から、図14に示すように、拡大表示部336のみが表示されている画面に切り替える。そして、例えば、オペレーターが全体表示部135で給紙部910の丸印を選択した場合、印刷機本体モニター装置300は、拡大表示部336に第1カメラ151から取得した給紙部910の映像を表示する。このようにして、印刷機本体モニター装置300は、特定の映像を、拡大して表示部120に表示することによって、特定の映像を他の映像よりも強調できる。 As shown in FIG. 14, the printing machine main body monitoring apparatus 300 displays only the enlarged display unit 336 as shown in FIG. 14 from the screen on which the first video display unit 331 to the fourth video display unit 334 are displayed. Switch to the current screen. For example, when the operator selects the circle of the paper feed unit 910 on the overall display unit 135, the printing press main body monitor device 300 displays the video of the paper feed unit 910 acquired from the first camera 151 on the enlarged display unit 336. indicate. In this way, the printing press main body monitoring apparatus 300 can emphasize a specific image more than other images by enlarging and displaying the specific image on the display unit 120.
 図15は、ポップアップ表示時の表示部を模式的に示す構成図である。また、印刷機本体モニター装置300は、図13に示す第1映像表示部331から第4映像表示部334が表示されている画面上に、図15に示す拡大表示部336を重ねて表示してもよい。この時、拡大表示部336は、第1映像表示部331から第4映像表示部334よりも、オペレーター側に表示される。 FIG. 15 is a configuration diagram schematically showing a display unit during pop-up display. Further, the printing press main body monitoring apparatus 300 displays the enlarged display unit 336 shown in FIG. 15 on the screen on which the first video display unit 331 to the fourth video display unit 334 shown in FIG. 13 are displayed. Also good. At this time, the enlarged display unit 336 is displayed closer to the operator than the first video display unit 331 to the fourth video display unit 334.
 つまり、この場合、印刷機本体モニター装置300は、図13に示す第1映像表示部331から第4映像表示部334が表示されている画面上に、拡大表示部336をポップアップ表示する。この場合であっても、印刷機本体モニター装置300は、特定の映像を、拡大して表示部120に表示することによって、特定の映像を他の映像よりも強調できる。 That is, in this case, the printing press main body monitoring apparatus 300 pops up the enlarged display unit 336 on the screen on which the first video display unit 331 to the fourth video display unit 334 shown in FIG. 13 are displayed. Even in this case, the printing press main body monitor apparatus 300 can emphasize a specific video image more than other video images by enlarging and displaying the specific video image on the display unit 120.
 図16は、強調枠が表示されている際の表示部を模式的に示す構成図である。また、印刷機本体モニター装置300は、図13に示す第1映像表示部331から第4映像表示部334が表示されている画面に、図16に示す強調枠337を表示してもよい。強調枠337は、第1映像表示部331から第4映像表示部334のいずれかの表示部を囲うように画面上に表示される。 FIG. 16 is a configuration diagram schematically showing a display unit when an emphasis frame is displayed. Further, the printing press main body monitoring apparatus 300 may display the emphasis frame 337 shown in FIG. 16 on the screen on which the first video display unit 331 to the fourth video display unit 334 shown in FIG. 13 are displayed. The emphasis frame 337 is displayed on the screen so as to surround any one of the first video display unit 331 to the fourth video display unit 334.
 例えば、オペレーターが全体表示部135で給紙部910の丸印を選択した場合、印刷機本体モニター装置300は、第1映像表示部331を囲うように強調枠337を表示部120に表示する。この場合、第1映像表示部331の面積は、第2映像表示部332から第4映像表示部334の表示部の面積と同じであっても、印刷機本体モニター装置300は、オペレーターが所望する映像を強調できる。 For example, when the operator selects the circle of the paper feed unit 910 on the entire display unit 135, the printing press main body monitor device 300 displays the highlight frame 337 on the display unit 120 so as to surround the first video display unit 331. In this case, even if the area of the first video display unit 331 is the same as the area of the display units of the second video display unit 332 to the fourth video display unit 334, the printing press main body monitoring device 300 is desired by the operator. The video can be emphasized.
 また、印刷機本体モニター装置300は、強調枠337を表示する代わりに、第1映像表示部331を表示部120の表示域の中央に表示することによって、第1映像表示部331を第2映像表示部332から第4映像表示部334よりも強調して表示してもよい。 Further, the printing press main body monitoring apparatus 300 displays the first video display unit 331 in the center of the display area of the display unit 120 instead of displaying the highlight frame 337, thereby causing the first video display unit 331 to display the second video. The display unit 332 may emphasize and display the fourth video display unit 334.
 ここで、オペレーターが全体表示部135の丸印を選択した場合以外に、印刷機本体モニター装置300は、印刷機本体モニター装置300が所定の各種信号を取得した場合も、第1映像表示部331から第4映像表示部334に表示されているいずれかの映像を強調して表示する。以下に、前記所定の各種信号について説明する。 Here, in addition to the case where the operator selects the circle on the whole display unit 135, the printing machine main body monitoring device 300 also includes the first video display unit 331 even when the printing machine main body monitoring device 300 acquires predetermined various signals. Any video displayed on the fourth video display unit 334 is highlighted. The predetermined various signals will be described below.
 図13に示すように、印刷機本体モニター装置300は、表示部120に印刷開始ボタン142と、印刷停止ボタン143と、を表示する。オペレーターが、入力部110を操作して表示部120に表示されている印刷開始ボタン142を操作すると、印刷機本体モニター装置300は、印刷開始信号を印刷開始ボタン142から取得する。 As shown in FIG. 13, the printer main body monitoring apparatus 300 displays a print start button 142 and a print stop button 143 on the display unit 120. When the operator operates the input unit 110 and operates the print start button 142 displayed on the display unit 120, the printing press main body monitor device 300 acquires a print start signal from the print start button 142.
 なお、印刷開始ボタン142は、表示部120に表示される電子的なボタンであって、仮想の操作部である。よって、実際は、印刷開始ボタン142が印刷開始信号を発生させるのではなく、オペレーターが入力部110を操作して印刷開始ボタン142を操作する作業を印刷機制御装置400が検出すると、印刷機制御装置400が印刷開始信号を取得したと判断する。 The print start button 142 is an electronic button displayed on the display unit 120 and is a virtual operation unit. Therefore, actually, when the printing press control device 400 detects that the operator operates the input unit 110 and operates the printing start button 142 instead of the print start button 142 generating the print start signal, the printing press control device 400 determines that a print start signal has been acquired.
 なお、印刷開始ボタン142は、表示部120に表示されている電子式のボタンに限定されず、例えば、オペレーターが可動部分を押すことによって2つの接点が接触して信号を発生させる機械式の押しボタンも含まれる。この場合、印刷機本体モニター装置300は、押しボタンがオペレーターによって操作されると、前記押しボタンから印刷開始信号を取得する。 The print start button 142 is not limited to the electronic button displayed on the display unit 120. For example, a mechanical push button that generates a signal by contacting two contact points when an operator pushes a movable part. A button is also included. In this case, when the push button is operated by the operator, the printing press main body monitor device 300 acquires a print start signal from the push button.
 印刷開始信号を取得すると、印刷機本体モニター装置300は、図1に示す給紙部910から印刷部930に紙Sを供給させる前に、まず、図14から図16に示すようにして、給紙部910の映像を強調して表示部120に表示させる。具体的には、印刷機本体モニター装置300は、図2に示す案内板921と、前当て922と、紙押さえ部材923とが共に撮像されている映像を強調して表示部120に表示する。 When the printing start signal is acquired, the printing press main body monitoring apparatus 300 first supplies the paper S as shown in FIGS. 14 to 16 before supplying the paper S from the paper feeding unit 910 to the printing unit 930 shown in FIG. The image of the paper portion 910 is emphasized and displayed on the display unit 120. Specifically, the printing press main body monitoring apparatus 300 emphasizes and displays on the display unit 120 an image in which the guide plate 921, the front pad 922, and the paper pressing member 923 shown in FIG.
 これにより、オペレーターは、表示部120に表示される給紙部910の映像を確認することで、例えば、給紙部910に不具合が生じるおそれがある場合に、表示部120に表示されている印刷停止ボタン143を操作して印刷の開始を中止できる。給紙部910に不具合が生じるおそれがある場合とは、例えば、新しい印刷ジョブを開始する際に、図2に示す案内板921上に紙Sが不連続に残っている場合である。 As a result, the operator confirms the image of the paper feed unit 910 displayed on the display unit 120. For example, when there is a possibility that the paper feed unit 910 may malfunction, the print displayed on the display unit 120 is displayed. The start of printing can be stopped by operating the stop button 143. The case where there is a possibility that a malfunction may occur in the paper feeding unit 910 is, for example, a case where the paper S remains discontinuously on the guide plate 921 shown in FIG. 2 when starting a new print job.
 新しい印刷ジョブを開始する際に、案内板921上に不連続に紙Sが残っている状態で紙Sが印刷部930に供給され始めると、案内板921に残っていた紙Sが印刷部930に供給された後に、新規の紙Sが印刷部930に供給されるまでの間に紙Sが供給されない時期が生じる。すると、印刷機本体900は、印刷機本体モニター装置300に給紙不具合発生信号を出力する。 When starting a new print job, when the paper S starts to be supplied to the printing unit 930 in a state where the paper S remains discontinuously on the guide plate 921, the paper S remaining on the guide plate 921 is printed. When the new paper S is supplied to the printing unit 930 after being supplied to the printing unit 930, there is a time when the paper S is not supplied. Then, the printer main body 900 outputs a paper feed failure occurrence signal to the printer main body monitor device 300.
 印刷機本体モニター装置300は、給紙不具合発生信号を取得すると、印刷機本体900の運転を停止させて、印刷機本体900を不具合発生モードとする。なお、不具合発生モードとは、印刷機本体900に不具合が発生した場合に、警告音を発生させたり、警告灯を発光させたりして、オペレーターに不具合の発生を伝えるモードである。 When the printing press main body monitor device 300 acquires the paper feed failure occurrence signal, the printing press main body 900 stops the operation of the printing press main body 900 and sets the printing press main body 900 to the failure occurrence mode. The failure occurrence mode is a mode in which when a failure occurs in the printing press main body 900, a warning sound is generated or a warning light is emitted to notify the operator of the occurrence of the failure.
 つまり、例えば、オペレーターが案内板921に紙Sが不連続の状態で残っていることに気付かずに、印刷機本体900の運転を開始すると、印刷機本体900が停止する。よって、オペレーターは、印刷機本体900の内部に残っていた紙Sを排出する作業や、印刷機本体900の不具合発生モードを解除する作業をする必要がある。これらの作業によって、オペレーターの手間が増加するおそれがある。 That is, for example, when the operator starts operating the printing press main body 900 without noticing that the paper S remains on the guide plate 921 in a discontinuous state, the printing press main body 900 stops. Therefore, the operator needs to perform an operation of discharging the paper S remaining in the printing press main body 900 or an operation of canceling the failure occurrence mode of the printing press main body 900. These operations may increase the labor of the operator.
 しかしながら、印刷機本体モニター装置300は、印刷部930に紙Sを供給するよりも前に、図13に示すように、表示部120に給紙部910の映像を表示する。これにより、オペレーターは、印刷機本体モニター装置300から離れることなく、表示部120の第1映像表示部331を目視して、案内板921に紙Sが残っているか否かを確認できる。 However, before supplying the paper S to the printing unit 930, the printing machine main body monitoring apparatus 300 displays the image of the paper feeding unit 910 on the display unit 120 as shown in FIG. As a result, the operator can check whether or not the paper S remains on the guide plate 921 by viewing the first video display unit 331 of the display unit 120 without leaving the printing press main body monitor device 300.
 そして、仮に、案内板921に紙Sが残っている状態でオペレーターが印刷開始ボタン142を操作したとしても、給紙部910から印刷部930に紙Sの供給が開始されるよりも前に、印刷機本体モニター装置300は、給紙部910の映像を図14から図16に示すようにして他の映像よりも強調して表示する。これにより、印刷機本体モニター装置300は、案内板921に紙Sが残っていることを強調して表示できる。 Even if the operator operates the print start button 142 with the paper S remaining on the guide plate 921, before the supply of the paper S from the paper supply unit 910 to the printing unit 930 is started, The printing press main body monitoring apparatus 300 displays the image of the paper feeding unit 910 with emphasis over other images as shown in FIGS. As a result, the printing press main body monitoring apparatus 300 can emphasize and display that the paper S remains on the guide plate 921.
 案内板921に紙Sが残っていることをオペレーターが確認した場合、オペレーターは、給紙部910から印刷部930に紙Sの供給が開始されるよりも前に、印刷停止ボタン143を操作して印刷機本体900が停止する前に印刷の開始を中止できる。 When the operator confirms that the paper S remains on the guide plate 921, the operator operates the print stop button 143 before the supply of the paper S from the paper feeding unit 910 to the printing unit 930 is started. Thus, the start of printing can be stopped before the printing press main body 900 stops.
 これにより、印刷機本体モニター装置300は、案内板921に紙Sが不連続に残っている状態で、新たな印刷が開始されるおそれを抑制できる。これにより、印刷機本体モニター装置300は、印刷機本体900が不具合発生モードとなることに起因する作業、具体的には、印刷機本体900の内部に残っていた紙Sを排出する作業や、印刷機本体900の不具合発生モードを解除する作業に要するオペレーターの手間を低減できる。 Thereby, the printing machine main body monitoring apparatus 300 can suppress a possibility that new printing is started in a state where the paper S remains discontinuously on the guide plate 921. As a result, the printing machine main body monitoring apparatus 300 can perform work caused by the printing machine main body 900 being in the failure occurrence mode, specifically, work for discharging the paper S remaining in the printing machine main body 900, It is possible to reduce the labor of the operator required for the operation of canceling the failure occurrence mode of the printing press main body 900.
 印刷機制御装置400は、オペレーターが印刷開始ボタン142を操作した後、所定の時間待機する。前記所定の時間内に印刷停止ボタン143が操作されない場合、印刷機制御装置400は、紙積装置911や紙送り装置920を制御して、給紙部910から印刷部930に紙Sを供給する。そして、印刷機制御装置400は、印刷部930を制御して、印刷部930の第1印刷ユニット931及び第2印刷ユニット932で紙Sの一方の面に印刷を施させる。 The printing press control apparatus 400 waits for a predetermined time after the operator operates the print start button 142. When the print stop button 143 is not operated within the predetermined time, the printing press control device 400 controls the paper stacking device 911 and the paper feeding device 920 to supply the paper S from the paper supply unit 910 to the printing unit 930. . Then, the printing press control apparatus 400 controls the printing unit 930 to perform printing on one surface of the paper S by the first printing unit 931 and the second printing unit 932 of the printing unit 930.
 そして、印刷機制御装置400は、反転部950を制御して紙Sを反転させる。そして、印刷機制御装置400は、印刷部930を制御して、第3印刷ユニット933及び第4印刷ユニット934で紙Sの他方の面に印刷を施させる。そして、印刷機制御装置400は、排紙部960を制御して、印刷が施された紙Sを排出する。このようにして、印刷機制御装置400は、印刷機本体900を運転する。 Then, the printing press control apparatus 400 controls the reversing unit 950 to invert the paper S. Then, the printing press control apparatus 400 controls the printing unit 930 to cause the third printing unit 933 and the fourth printing unit 934 to print on the other side of the paper S. Then, the printing press control apparatus 400 controls the paper discharge unit 960 to discharge the printed paper S. In this way, the printing press control apparatus 400 operates the printing press main body 900.
 ここで、印刷機本体900の運転中、印刷機本体900は、例えば、給紙部910で紙詰まりが発生する場合がある。具体的には、印刷機本体900は、図2に示す紙押さえ部材923と、案内板921との間に紙Sが詰まる場合がある。また、印刷機本体900は、紙Sの咥え側Stが前当て922に対して斜めに接触して、給紙ミスが発生する場合がある。このような場合、給紙部910は、印刷機本体モニター装置300に給紙不具合発生信号を出力する。 Here, during operation of the printing press main body 900, the printing press main body 900 may cause a paper jam in the paper supply unit 910, for example. Specifically, in the printing machine main body 900, the paper S may be jammed between the paper pressing member 923 shown in FIG. 2 and the guide plate 921. Further, in the printing press main body 900, a paper feeding error may occur because the grip side St of the paper S is in contact with the front contact 922 at an angle. In such a case, the paper feed unit 910 outputs a paper feed failure occurrence signal to the printing press main body monitor device 300.
 印刷機本体モニター装置300は、給紙不具合発生信号を取得すると、図13に示すように、第1映像表示部331から第4映像表示部334までを表示部120に表示させている画面から、図14から図16に示すように給紙部910の映像を強調して表示する画面に自動で切り替える。これにより、オペレーターは、全体表示部135を操作することなく、不具合が生じた部分の映像を確認できる。 When the printing press main body monitoring apparatus 300 acquires the paper feed failure occurrence signal, as shown in FIG. 13, from the screen displaying the first video display unit 331 to the fourth video display unit 334 on the display unit 120, As shown in FIGS. 14 to 16, the screen is automatically switched to a screen that emphasizes and displays the image of the paper feeding unit 910. As a result, the operator can check the video of the portion where the problem has occurred without operating the entire display unit 135.
 また、印刷機本体900の運転中、印刷機本体900は、例えば、反転部950で紙Sが正しく反転胴953に巻き付けられない場合がある。この場合、印刷機本体900は、紙Sがしわになったり、紙Sに跡が残ったりして、紙Sにダメージを与えることがある。このような場合、反転部950は、印刷機本体モニター装置300に反転不具合発生信号を出力する。 In addition, during operation of the printing press main body 900, the printing press main body 900 may not be able to correctly wind the paper S around the reversing cylinder 953 by the reversing unit 950, for example. In this case, the printing machine main body 900 may damage the paper S because the paper S is wrinkled or a mark remains on the paper S. In such a case, the reversing unit 950 outputs a reversal failure occurrence signal to the printing press main body monitor device 300.
 印刷機本体モニター装置300は、反転不具合発生信号を取得すると、図13に示すように、第1映像表示部331から第4映像表示部334までを表示部120に表示させている画面から、図14及び図15に示す拡大表示部336に反転部950の映像を表示させる画面に切り替えて、反転部950の映像を強調して表示する。 When the printing press main body monitoring apparatus 300 acquires the reverse failure occurrence signal, as shown in FIG. 13, the screen from the first video display unit 331 to the fourth video display unit 334 is displayed on the display unit 120. 14 and the screen for displaying the video of the reversing unit 950 on the enlarged display unit 336 shown in FIG. 15, and the video of the reversing unit 950 is highlighted and displayed.
 または、印刷機本体モニター装置300は、図16に示す強調枠337で、反転部950の映像が表示されている第2映像表示部332を囲うことで、強調して表示する。これにより、オペレーターは、全体表示部135を操作することなく、不具合が生じた部分の映像を確認できる。 Alternatively, the printing press main body monitor device 300 displays the highlighted image by surrounding the second image display unit 332 on which the image of the reversing unit 950 is displayed with the emphasis frame 337 shown in FIG. As a result, the operator can check the video of the portion where the problem has occurred without operating the entire display unit 135.
 また、印刷機本体900の運転中、印刷機本体900は、例えば、排紙部960で正しく紙Sが排出されない場合がある。この場合、印刷機本体900は、紙Sがベルトから落下したり、紙Sにダメージを与えたりすることがある。このような場合、排紙部960は、印刷機本体モニター装置300に排紙不具合発生信号を出力する。 In addition, during operation of the printing press main body 900, the printing press main body 900 may not correctly discharge the paper S by the paper discharge unit 960, for example. In this case, the printing machine main body 900 may cause the paper S to fall from the belt or damage the paper S. In such a case, the paper discharge unit 960 outputs a paper discharge failure occurrence signal to the printing press main body monitor device 300.
 印刷機本体モニター装置300は、排紙不具合発生信号を取得すると、図13に示すように、第1映像表示部331から第4映像表示部334までを表示部120に表示させている画面から、図14及び図15に示す拡大表示部336に排紙部960の映像を表示させる画面に切り替えて、排紙部960の映像を強調して表示する。 When the printing press main body monitoring apparatus 300 acquires the paper discharge failure occurrence signal, as shown in FIG. 13, from the screen displaying the first video display unit 331 to the fourth video display unit 334 on the display unit 120, The screen is switched to a screen for displaying the image of the paper discharge unit 960 on the enlarged display unit 336 shown in FIGS. 14 and 15, and the video of the paper discharge unit 960 is highlighted and displayed.
 ここで、排紙部960の映像は、第3カメラ153が撮像した映像と、第4カメラ154が撮像した映像の2つがある。印刷機本体モニター装置300は、第3カメラ153が撮像した映像と、第4カメラ154が撮像した映像との2つを拡大表示部336に表示してもよいし、どちらか一方を拡大表示部336に表示してもよい。 Here, there are two images of the paper discharge unit 960: an image captured by the third camera 153 and an image captured by the fourth camera 154. The printing press main body monitor device 300 may display two images, the image captured by the third camera 153 and the image captured by the fourth camera 154, on the enlarged display unit 336, or one of them may be displayed on the enlarged display unit. 336 may be displayed.
 また、印刷機本体モニター装置300は、第3カメラ153が撮像した映像と、第4カメラ154が撮像した映像の2つから、拡大表示部336に表示する映像をオペレーターが選択できる構成でもよい。 Further, the printing press main body monitor device 300 may be configured such that the operator can select the video to be displayed on the enlarged display unit 336 from two images captured by the third camera 153 and the image captured by the fourth camera 154.
 つまり、印刷機本体モニター装置300は、排紙不具合発生信号を取得すると、第3カメラ153が撮像した映像と、第4カメラ154が撮像した映像とのうち少なくとも一方を、第1カメラ151が撮像した映像及び第2カメラ152が撮像した映像よりも強調して表示部120に表示すればよい。 That is, when the printing press main body monitoring apparatus 300 acquires the discharge failure occurrence signal, the first camera 151 captures at least one of the image captured by the third camera 153 and the image captured by the fourth camera 154. What is necessary is just to emphasize and display on the display part 120 rather than the image | video and the image | video which the 2nd camera 152 imaged.
 または、印刷機本体モニター装置300は、図16に示す強調枠337で、排紙部960の映像が表示されている第3映像表示部333及び第4映像表示部334を囲うことで、強調して表示する。これにより、オペレーターは、全体表示部135を操作することなく、不具合が生じた部分の映像を確認できる。 Alternatively, the printing press main body monitoring apparatus 300 emphasizes by enclosing the third video display unit 333 and the fourth video display unit 334 on which the video of the paper discharge unit 960 is displayed with the emphasis frame 337 shown in FIG. To display. As a result, the operator can check the video of the portion where the problem has occurred without operating the entire display unit 135.
 ここで、一般的な制御装置は、印刷機本体に不具合が生じた際に、表示部に不具合が生じたことを表示するのみの構成が多い。よって、オペレーターは、不具合が生じた部位を、制御装置から離れて実際に印刷機本体の各部を目視して確認するか、または、制御装置を操作して表示部に表示されている映像を切り替える必要がある。 Here, there are many configurations in which a general control device only displays that a malfunction has occurred on the display unit when a malfunction has occurred in the printing press main body. Therefore, the operator can confirm the part where the malfunction has occurred by visually observing each part of the printing press main body or switching the video displayed on the display unit by operating the control device. There is a need.
 また、仮に不具合が生じた部位がどこであるかを表示する制御装置であっても、オペレーターは、制御装置から離れて実際に印刷機本体の各部を目視して確認するか、または、制御装置を操作して映像を切り替える必要がある。 In addition, even if the control device displays the location of the troubled part, the operator can confirm by visually checking each part of the printing machine body away from the control device, or It is necessary to switch the video by operating.
 しかしながら、印刷機本体モニター装置300は、仮に印刷機本体900に不具合が生じた場合、不具合が生じた部位の映像を自動で表示部120に強調して表示させる。これにより、オペレーターは、印刷機本体900のどこの部分で不具合が生じたかを調べることなく、不具合が生じた部位を把握できる。さらに、オペレーターは、全体表示部135を操作することなく、また、印刷機本体モニター装置300から離れることなく、不具合が生じた部位の映像を確認できる。 However, if a problem occurs in the printing machine main body 900, the printing machine main body monitoring apparatus 300 automatically highlights and displays an image of the part where the trouble occurs on the display unit 120. As a result, the operator can grasp the part where the problem has occurred without examining where in the printing machine body 900 the problem has occurred. Furthermore, the operator can confirm the image of the site where the problem has occurred without operating the overall display unit 135 and without leaving the printing press main body monitor device 300.
 以上により、印刷機本体モニター装置300は、給紙部910から印刷部930への紙Sの供給が始まるよりも前に、給紙部910の映像を表示部120に自動で強調して表示する。これにより、オペレーターが自分で表示部120に表示されている映像を切り替える必要がなく、オペレーターは、給紙部910の映像を確認できる。これにより、印刷機本体モニター装置300は、オペレーターが表示部120に表示されている映像を手動で切り替える手間を低減できる。 As described above, the printing press main body monitoring apparatus 300 automatically highlights and displays the image of the paper feeding unit 910 on the display unit 120 before the supply of the paper S from the paper feeding unit 910 to the printing unit 930 starts. . This eliminates the need for the operator to switch the video displayed on the display unit 120 by himself / herself, and allows the operator to check the video on the paper feeding unit 910. As a result, the printing press main body monitoring apparatus 300 can reduce the trouble of manually switching the video displayed on the display unit 120 by the operator.
 さらに、給紙部910から印刷部930への紙Sの供給が始まるよりも前に、給紙部910の映像を強調して表示部120に表示することにより、印刷機本体モニター装置300は、印刷機本体900が停止して不具合発生モードとなることを抑制できる。これにより、印刷機本体モニター装置300は、印刷機本体900の内部に残っていた紙Sを排出する作業や、印刷機本体900の不具合発生モードを解除する作業に要するオペレーターの手間を低減できる。 Furthermore, before the supply of the paper S from the paper feeding unit 910 to the printing unit 930 starts, the video of the paper feeding unit 910 is highlighted and displayed on the display unit 120, so that the printing press main body monitor device 300 can It is possible to suppress the printer main body 900 from being stopped and being in the failure occurrence mode. As a result, the printing press main body monitoring apparatus 300 can reduce the labor of the operator required for the work of discharging the paper S remaining inside the printing press main body 900 and the work for canceling the malfunction occurrence mode of the printing press main body 900.
 また、印刷機本体モニター装置300は、オペレーターが印刷機本体モニター装置300から離れることなく、不具合が生じた部位を確認できる。このようにして、印刷機本体モニター装置300は、オペレーターの手間を低減できる。 In addition, the printing press main body monitoring apparatus 300 can confirm the part where the trouble has occurred without leaving the operator from the printing press main body monitoring apparatus 300. In this way, the printing press main body monitor device 300 can reduce the labor of the operator.
 なお、本実施形態では、撮像部150の各カメラは、給紙部910と、反転部950と、排紙部960とに取り付けられるものとして説明したが、撮像部150のカメラは、印刷機本体900の他の部位に取り付けられてもよい。 In the present embodiment, each camera of the imaging unit 150 has been described as being attached to the paper feeding unit 910, the reversing unit 950, and the paper discharge unit 960. However, the camera of the imaging unit 150 is a printer main body. It may be attached to other parts of 900.
 印刷機本体モニター装置300は、少なくとも1つの部位にカメラが取り付けられ、不具合が生じた際に、不具合が生じた部位にカメラが設けられている場合、不具合が生じた部位に設けられている前記カメラが撮像した映像を表示部120に自動で表示する構成であればよい。 When the camera is attached to at least one part and the camera is provided at the part where the problem occurs, the printing machine main body monitoring device 300 is provided at the part where the problem occurs. Any configuration may be used as long as the image captured by the camera is automatically displayed on the display unit 120.
 例えば、給紙部910のみにカメラが1つ取り付けられる場合、印刷機本体モニター装置300は、給紙部910に不具合が生じた場合に、前記カメラが撮像した給紙部910の映像を表示部120に自動で表示する。このとき、印刷機本体モニター装置300は、給紙部910の映像を例えば拡大して表示部120に自動で表示する。 For example, when one camera is attached only to the paper feeding unit 910, the printing machine main body monitoring device 300 displays a video of the paper feeding unit 910 captured by the camera when a malfunction occurs in the paper feeding unit 910. 120 is automatically displayed. At this time, the printing press main body monitor 300 automatically enlarges the image of the paper feeding unit 910 and automatically displays it on the display unit 120, for example.
 印刷機本体モニター装置300は、枚葉印刷機以外にも、例えば、輪転印刷機の各部の映像を表示部120に表示させてもよい。この場合、印刷機本体モニター装置300は、例えば、紙継ぎをするペースターユニットを撮像するカメラを備え、紙継ぎを開始する信号を取得すると、自動でペースターユニットの映像を強調して表示部120に表示させる。 In addition to the sheet-fed printing machine, the printing machine main body monitoring apparatus 300 may display, for example, images of each part of the rotary printing machine on the display unit 120. In this case, the printing machine main body monitoring apparatus 300 includes, for example, a camera that images a paster unit that performs paper splicing. When a signal for starting paper splicing is acquired, the video of the paster unit is automatically emphasized on the display unit 120. Display.
 この場合であっても、印刷機本体モニター装置300は、オペレーターが手動で映像を切り替える必要がないため、オペレーターの手間を低減できる。 Even in this case, the printing press main body monitor device 300 does not require the operator to manually switch the image, so that it is possible to reduce the trouble of the operator.
 なお、表示部120に表示される映像は、なめらかな動画に限定されず、静止画が連続して表示されるような、いわゆるコマ落ちした動画であってもよい。つまり、表示部120に表示される映像は、オペレーターが例えば拡大表示部336を見ることで、不具合の原因を把握できる程度の質が確保されていればよい。 Note that the video displayed on the display unit 120 is not limited to a smooth moving image, and may be a so-called dropped frame moving image in which still images are continuously displayed. In other words, the video displayed on the display unit 120 only needs to have a quality that allows the operator to grasp the cause of the malfunction by looking at the enlarged display unit 336, for example.
 また、印刷機本体モニター装置300は、印刷機本体900のオペレーターの手間以外にも、印刷機本体900を管理する管理者の手間や、印刷機本体900をメンテナンスする整備作業者の手間を低減する機能も実現できる。以下に、そのための印刷機本体モニター装置300の構成を説明する。 Further, the printing press main body monitoring device 300 reduces the trouble of the administrator who manages the printing press main body 900 and the maintenance worker who maintains the printing press main body 900 in addition to the trouble of the operator of the printing press main body 900. Functions can also be realized. The configuration of the printing press main body monitor apparatus 300 for that purpose will be described below.
 印刷機本体モニター装置300は、例えば、図6に示すカメラサーバ160を含んで構成される。ここで、カメラサーバ160が録画する映像は、第1映像表示部331から第4映像表示部334に表示させる4つの映像のすべてでもよいし、4つの映像の中からオペレーターが選択した映像のみでもよい。また、印刷機本体モニター装置300は、表示部120に自動で強調して表示させる映像、具体的には、印刷開始ボタン142が操作された直後の給紙部910の映像や、不具合が生じた部位の映像を、自動的に録画して記憶装置161に格納する構成でもよい。 The printing press main body monitor apparatus 300 includes, for example, a camera server 160 shown in FIG. Here, the video recorded by the camera server 160 may be all four videos displayed on the fourth video display unit 334 from the first video display unit 331 or only the video selected by the operator from the four videos. Good. In addition, the printing machine main body monitoring device 300 has an image that is automatically emphasized and displayed on the display unit 120, specifically, an image of the paper feeding unit 910 immediately after the print start button 142 is operated, or a problem has occurred. The configuration may be such that the video of the part is automatically recorded and stored in the storage device 161.
 なお、シリコンディスクは、記憶装置161に比べて格納できる総容量の確保が難しい。そこで、印刷機本体モニター装置300は、不具合が生じる前後で所定期間、不具合が生じた部位の映像を録画し、この録画映像をシリコンディスクに保存する構成でもよい。 Note that it is difficult to secure the total capacity of a silicon disk that can be stored compared to the storage device 161. Therefore, the printing press main body monitoring apparatus 300 may be configured to record a video of a site where the problem occurs for a predetermined period before and after the problem occurs, and store the recorded video on a silicon disk.
 この場合、印刷機本体モニター装置300は、常に、印刷機本体900の各部の映像をすべて録画して記憶装置161に格納しておき、所定期間が過ぎた録画映像を記憶装置161から削除する。そして、仮に印刷機本体900に不具合が生じた場合には、不具合が生じた部位の映像を、不具合が生じた時期以前の録画映像と、不具合が生じた時期以降、所定期間録画した録画映像とをシリコンディスクに保存する。 In this case, the printing press main body monitoring apparatus 300 always records all the videos of each part of the printing press main body 900 and stores them in the storage device 161, and deletes the recorded video after a predetermined period from the storage device 161. If a malfunction occurs in the printing press main body 900, the video of the part where the malfunction occurred is recorded as a recorded video before the malfunction occurred, and a recorded video recorded for a predetermined period after the malfunction occurred. On a silicon disk.
 このようにして、印刷機本体モニター装置300は、着脱可能記憶装置接続装置162に接続されるシリコンディスクに印刷機本体900の各部の録画映像を格納できる。これにより、例えば、印刷機本体900のメンテナンスをする整備作業者は、シリコンディスクを自社に持ち帰って印刷機本体900に不具合が生じた際の印刷機本体900の各部の録画映像を容易に確認できる。よって、印刷機本体モニター装置300は、印刷機本体900をメンテナンスする整備作業者の手間を低減できる。 In this way, the printing press main body monitoring device 300 can store the recorded video of each part of the printing press main body 900 on the silicon disk connected to the removable storage device connecting device 162. Thereby, for example, a maintenance worker who performs maintenance of the printing press main body 900 can easily check the recorded video of each part of the printing press main body 900 when the malfunction occurs in the printing press main body 900 by taking the silicon disk home. . Therefore, the printing press main body monitoring device 300 can reduce the labor of a maintenance worker who maintains the printing press main body 900.
 このように、設定入力補助装置及び印刷機本体モニター装置ならびに印刷機は、オペレーターが設定対象の設定値を入力するものに有用であり、オペレーターの作業量を低減することに適している。 As described above, the setting input assist device, the printing press main body monitoring device, and the printing press are useful for an operator to input setting values to be set, and are suitable for reducing the amount of work for the operator.
 1、3 印刷機
 31 備考表示部
 32 紙指定部
 33 拡大映像表示部
 34 設定対象映像表示部
 40 プリセット選択部
 41 登録ボタン
 42 読出ボタン
 43 候補表示ボタン
 44 全体表示ボタン
 45 紙サイズ絞込ボタン
 46 色数絞込ボタン
 47 紙種絞込ボタン
 48 紙厚絞込ボタン
 49 印刷速度絞込ボタン
 50 比較ボタン
 51 映像表示部
 52 カメラ切替ボタン
 53 パン/チルト切替ボタン
 54 回動ボタン
 55 登録ボタン
 100 設定入力補助装置
 110 入力部
 120 表示部
 131、331 第1映像表示部
 132、332 第2映像表示部
 133、333 第3映像表示部
 134、334 第4映像表示部
 135 全体表示部
 136 設定対象映像表示部
 138 録画時間表示部
 140 ボタン類
 141 設定ボタン
 141a 昇降装置設定ボタン
 141b 紙送り装置用空気噴出装置設定ボタン
 141c 反転部用空気噴出装置設定ボタン
 141d 排紙部用第1空気噴出装置設定ボタン
 141e 排紙部用第2空気噴出装置設定ボタン
 142 印刷開始ボタン
 143 印刷停止ボタン
 144 録画開始ボタン
 145 録画停止ボタン
 146 再生ボタン
 147 設定操作補助域
 148 プリセット選択部
 150 撮像部
 151 第1カメラ
 152 第2カメラ
 153 第3カメラ
 154 第4カメラ
 160 カメラサーバ
 161 記憶装置
 162 着脱可能記憶装置接続装置
 163 通信回線接続装置
 170 紙送り装置用空気噴出装置
 171 噴出口
 180 反転部用空気噴出装置
 181 反転部用第1空気噴出装置
 182 反転部用第2空気噴出装置
 183 反転部用第3空気噴出装置
 184 反転部用第4空気噴出装置
 190 排紙部用空気噴出装置
 191 排紙部用第1空気噴出装置
 192 排紙部用第2空気噴出装置
 200、400 印刷機制御装置
 300 印刷機本体モニター装置
 336 拡大表示部
 337 強調枠
 800 パーソナルコンピュータ
 900 印刷機本体
 901 カバー
 910 給紙部
 911 紙積装置
 920 紙送り装置
 921 案内板
 922 前当て
 923 紙押さえ部材
 923a 昇降装置
 924 スインググリッパー
 924a 回動軸
 924b グリッパー側爪
 930 印刷部
 931 第1印刷ユニット
 932 第2印刷ユニット
 933 第3印刷ユニット
 934 第4印刷ユニット
 940 胴群
 941 中間胴
 942 版胴
 943 ブランケット胴
 944 圧胴
 950 反転部
 951 反転中間胴
 952 反転倍胴
 953 反転胴
 960 排紙部
 961 排紙台
 962 チェーン
 963 排紙胴
 964 従動軸
 965 グリッパー
 966 チャンバーガイド
 S 紙
 Sb 咥え尻側
 St 咥え側
1, 3 Printing machine 31 Remarks display part 32 Paper designation part 33 Enlarged picture display part 34 Setting target picture display part 40 Preset selection part 41 Registration button 42 Read button 43 Candidate display button 44 Whole display button 45 Paper size narrow down button 46 Color Number narrowing button 47 Paper type narrowing button 48 Paper thickness narrowing button 49 Printing speed narrowing button 50 Comparison button 51 Video display section 52 Camera switching button 53 Pan / tilt switching button 54 Rotation button 55 Registration button 100 Setting input assistance Device 110 Input unit 120 Display unit 131, 331 First video display unit 132, 332 Second video display unit 133, 333 Third video display unit 134, 334 Fourth video display unit 135 Overall display unit 136 Setting target video display unit 138 Recording time display section 140 Buttons 141 Setting button 141a Elevating Device setting button 141b Paper ejecting device air ejecting device setting button 141c Reversing portion air ejecting device setting button 141d Paper ejecting portion first air ejecting device setting button 141e Paper ejecting portion second air ejecting device setting button 142 Print start button 143 Print stop button 144 Recording start button 145 Recording stop button 146 Play button 147 Setting operation assistance area 148 Preset selection section 150 Imaging section 151 First camera 152 Second camera 153 Third camera 154 Fourth camera 160 Camera server 161 Storage device 162 Removable storage device connection device 163 Communication line connection device 170 Air jet device for paper feeding device 171 Jet port 180 Air jet device for reversing unit 181 First air jet device for reversing unit 182 Second air jet device for reversing unit 183 Reverse unit 3rd air blasting equipment 184 Fourth air ejection device for reversing unit 190 Air ejection device for paper ejection unit 191 First air ejection device for paper ejection unit 192 Second air ejection device for paper ejection unit 200, 400 Printer control device 300 Printer main body monitor Device 336 Enlarged display portion 337 Emphasis frame 800 Personal computer 900 Printer main body 901 Cover 910 Paper feed portion 911 Paper stacking device 920 Paper feeding device 921 Guide plate 922 Fronting 923 Paper pressing member 923a Lifting device 924 Swing gripper 924a Rotating shaft 924b Gripper side nail 930 Printing unit 931 First printing unit 932 Second printing unit 933 Third printing unit 934 Fourth printing unit 940 Cylinder group 941 Intermediate cylinder 942 Plate cylinder 943 Blanket cylinder 944 Pressure cylinder 950 Reversing section 951 Reversing intermediate cylinder 952 Reversing Double 953 convertible cylinder 960 discharge unit 961 discharge tray 962 chain 963 delivery cylinder 964 driven shaft 965 gripper 966 chambers Guide S sheet Sb tail edge side St leading edge side

Claims (29)

  1.  被記録媒体に印刷を施す印刷機本体に設けられて、前記印刷機本体を構成する一部である設定対象を撮像するカメラと、
     前記設定対象を制御するために必要な情報を表示する少なくとも1つの表示部と、
     が接続される設定入力補助装置であって、
     前記設定入力補助装置は、
     前記設定対象の設定をこれから開始する操作を補助する画像が表示される設定開始操作補助域を前記表示部に表示し、
     前記設定対象の設定をこれから開始する操作に基づいて、
     前記設定対象の映像と、
     前記設定対象を制御するための設定値の入力を補助する画像を表示する設定操作補助域と、
     を前記表示部に表示することを特徴とする設定入力補助装置。
    A camera that is provided in a printer main body that performs printing on a recording medium and that captures a setting target that is a part of the printer main body;
    At least one display unit for displaying information necessary for controlling the setting target;
    Is a setting input auxiliary device to which
    The setting input auxiliary device is
    A setting start operation auxiliary area in which an image for assisting an operation of starting the setting target setting is displayed is displayed on the display unit;
    Based on the operation to start the setting target setting,
    The video to be set;
    A setting operation auxiliary area for displaying an image for assisting input of a setting value for controlling the setting object;
    Is displayed on the display unit.
  2.  前記設定入力補助装置は、
     前記設定対象の設定をこれから開始する操作がなされると、設定操作開始信号を取得し、
     前記設定操作開始信号を取得すると、
     前記設定対象の映像と、
     前記設定操作補助域と、
     を前記表示部に表示することを特徴とする請求項1に記載の設定入力補助装置。
    The setting input auxiliary device is
    When an operation to start setting of the setting target is performed, a setting operation start signal is acquired,
    When obtaining the setting operation start signal,
    The video to be set;
    The setting operation auxiliary area;
    Is displayed on the display unit. 2. The setting input auxiliary device according to claim 1, wherein
  3.  前記設定対象は複数存在し、
     前記カメラは、複数の前記設定対象にそれぞれ設けられ、
     前記複数の前記設定対象のうちの1つである特定設定対象の設定をこれから開始する際に取得する信号であって、前記設定操作開始信号の1つである特定設定操作開始信号を取得すると、
     前記特定設定対象の映像と、
     前記設定操作補助域として、前記特定設定対象を制御するための設定値の入力を補助する画像を表示する特定設定操作補助域と、
     を前記表示部に表示することを特徴とする請求項2に記載の設定入力補助装置。
    There are a plurality of the setting targets,
    The camera is provided for each of the plurality of setting objects,
    When acquiring a specific setting operation start signal that is one of the setting operation start signals, a signal that is acquired when the setting of a specific setting target that is one of the plurality of setting objects is started from now on,
    The specific setting target video;
    As the setting operation auxiliary area, a specific setting operation auxiliary area for displaying an image for assisting input of a setting value for controlling the specific setting object;
    The setting input auxiliary device according to claim 2, wherein:
  4.  前記設定操作開始信号を取得すると、
     あらかじめ設定された前記設定値を選択する部分であるプリセット選択部を前記表示部に表示することを特徴とする請求項2に記載の設定入力補助装置。
    When obtaining the setting operation start signal,
    The setting input auxiliary device according to claim 2, wherein a preset selection unit that is a part for selecting the setting value set in advance is displayed on the display unit.
  5.  情報を記憶する記憶手段を備え、
     前記カメラが撮像した映像のうちの少なくとも一部を記憶手段に格納することを特徴とする請求項2に記載の設定入力補助装置。
    Comprising storage means for storing information;
    The setting input auxiliary device according to claim 2, wherein at least a part of an image captured by the camera is stored in a storage unit.
  6.  前記カメラが撮像した映像のうちの少なくとも一部を、前記設定入力補助装置が接続される通信回線を介して前記設定入力補助装置の外部に提供することを特徴とする請求項2に記載の設定入力補助装置。 3. The setting according to claim 2, wherein at least a part of an image captured by the camera is provided to the outside of the setting input auxiliary device via a communication line to which the setting input auxiliary device is connected. Input auxiliary device.
  7.  前記印刷機本体を構成し、前記被記録媒体に印刷を施す印刷部は、
     前記被記録媒体の被記録面を反転させる反転部と、
     前記反転部を走行する前記被記録媒体に向かって空気を噴出する反転部用空気噴出装置と、
     を含んで構成され、
     前記カメラは、反転部の部分のうち、前記反転部用空気噴出装置が噴出する前記空気が導かれる部分を撮像し、
     前記設定入力補助装置は、前記反転部用空気噴出装置が噴出する前記空気の流量を調節するための信号であって、前記設定操作開始信号の1つである反転部用空気噴出装置設定操作信号を取得すると、
     前記反転部用空気噴出装置が噴出する前記空気が導かれる部分の映像と、
     前記反転部用空気噴出装置を制御して前記流量を調節するための設定値を入力する部分である流量設定用の前記設定操作補助域と、
     を前記表示部に表示することを特徴とする請求項2に記載の設定入力補助装置。
    A printing unit that constitutes the printing machine main body and performs printing on the recording medium,
    A reversing unit for reversing the recording surface of the recording medium;
    A reversing part air ejecting device that ejects air toward the recording medium traveling through the reversing part;
    Comprising
    The camera images a portion of the reversing portion from which the air ejected by the reversing portion air ejection device is guided,
    The setting input auxiliary device is a signal for adjusting the flow rate of the air ejected by the reversing unit air ejection device, and is one of the setting operation start signals. Get
    An image of a portion of the air guided by the reversing unit air ejection device;
    The setting operation auxiliary area for flow rate setting, which is a part for inputting a set value for adjusting the flow rate by controlling the air jet device for the reversing unit,
    The setting input auxiliary device according to claim 2, wherein:
  8.  前記記憶手段は、複数の被記録媒体が順次走行する様子が撮像された映像から、特定の被記録媒体が撮像された部分を抽出するための特定情報を格納することを特徴とする請求項5に記載の設定入力補助装置。 6. The storage means stores specific information for extracting a portion where a specific recording medium is imaged from an image obtained by imaging a state in which a plurality of recording media sequentially travels. The setting input auxiliary device described in 1.
  9.  前記複数の被記録媒体の中から特定の被記録媒体を指定する操作がなされると、前記特定情報に基づいて、前記カメラが撮像した映像から前記特定の被記録媒体が撮像された部分を抽出し、前記特定の被記録媒体が撮像された部分の映像を前記表示部に表示させることを特徴とする請求項8に記載の設定入力補助装置。 When an operation for designating a specific recording medium from among the plurality of recording media is performed, a portion where the specific recording medium is imaged is extracted from an image captured by the camera based on the specific information. The setting input auxiliary device according to claim 8, wherein an image of a part of the specific recording medium captured is displayed on the display unit.
  10.  前記カメラが複数設けられ、
     前記複数の被記録媒体の中から特定の被記録媒体を指定する操作がなされると、前記特定情報に基づいて、前記カメラが撮像した映像から前記特定の被記録媒体が撮像された部分を前記カメラ毎に特定し、前記特定の被記録媒体が撮像された部分の映像を前記カメラ毎に前記表示部に表示させることを特徴とする請求項9に記載の設定入力補助装置。
    A plurality of the cameras are provided,
    When an operation for designating a specific recording medium from among the plurality of recording media is performed, based on the specific information, a portion where the specific recording medium is imaged from an image captured by the camera is selected. The setting input assisting device according to claim 9, wherein the setting input assisting device is specified for each camera, and an image of a portion where the specific recording medium is captured is displayed on the display unit for each camera.
  11.  前記特定の被記録媒体が撮像された部分の映像を前記表示部に表示させる際、前記特定の被記録媒体が撮像された時の印刷条件を前記表示部に表示させることを特徴とする請求項9に記載の設定入力補助装置。 The display unit displays a printing condition when the specific recording medium is imaged when displaying an image of a part of the specific recording medium imaged on the display unit. 9. The setting input auxiliary device according to 9.
  12.  前記カメラが撮像した映像を記憶する記憶手段を備え、
     前記プリセット選択部に表示されている前記設定値のリストのうちの特定の設定値が選択されると、選択された設定値で被記録媒体が前記印刷機本体を走行した際に前記カメラが撮像した映像を、前記記憶手段から取得して前記表示部に表示させることを特徴とする請求項4に記載の設定入力補助装置。
    Comprising storage means for storing video captured by the camera;
    When a specific setting value is selected from the list of setting values displayed in the preset selection unit, the camera captures an image when the recording medium travels through the printer body with the selected setting value. The setting input auxiliary device according to claim 4, wherein the obtained video is acquired from the storage unit and displayed on the display unit.
  13.  前記選択された設定値で被記録媒体が前記印刷機本体を走行した際に前記カメラが撮像した映像と共に、前記カメラが現在撮像している映像を前記表示部に表示させることを特徴とする請求項12に記載の設定入力補助装置。 The video image currently captured by the camera is displayed on the display unit together with an image captured by the camera when the recording medium travels through the printer main body at the selected setting value. Item 13. A setting input assisting device according to Item 12.
  14.  前記プリセット選択部に表示される前記リストに含まれる複数の前記設定値を印刷条件に基づいて並べ替えて前記表示部に表示させることと、
     前記複数の前記設定値に対して前記印刷条件で絞り込み検索を行い、前記絞り込み検索で該当した設定値を前記表示部に表示させることと、
     のうちの少なくとも1つを実行することを特徴とする請求項12に記載の設定入力補助装置。
    Rearranging a plurality of the setting values included in the list displayed in the preset selection unit based on printing conditions and displaying them on the display unit;
    Performing a refinement search with the printing conditions for the plurality of the set values, and displaying the set value corresponding to the refinement search on the display unit;
    The setting input auxiliary device according to claim 12, wherein at least one of the following is executed.
  15.  前記印刷条件は、被記録媒体が前記印刷機本体を走行する速度と、前記被記録媒体の平面寸法と、前記被記録媒体の厚さと、前記被記録媒体の種類と、前記印刷機本体が前記被記録媒体に印刷を施す際に用いられる色数と、のうちの少なくとも1つであることを特徴とする請求項14に記載の設定入力補助装置。 The printing conditions include the speed at which the recording medium travels through the printing machine body, the planar dimensions of the recording medium, the thickness of the recording medium, the type of the recording medium, and the printing machine body The setting input auxiliary device according to claim 14, wherein the setting input auxiliary device is at least one of the number of colors used when printing on the recording medium.
  16.  被記録媒体に印刷を施す印刷部と、
     前記印刷部に前記被記録媒体を供給する給紙部と、
     前記被記録媒体の被記録面を反転させる反転部と、
     前記印刷部で印刷が施された前記被記録媒体を排出する排紙部と、
     前記印刷部と、前記給紙部と、前記反転部と、前記排紙部とのうち少なくとも1つに設けられて設定対象を撮像するカメラと、
     前記設定対象を制御するために必要な情報を表示する少なくとも1つの表示部と、
     が接続される印刷機であって、
     前記印刷機は、
     前記設定対象の設定をこれから開始する操作を補助する画像が表示される設定開始操作補助域を前記表示部に表示し、
     前記設定対象の設定をこれから開始する操作に基づいて、
     前記設定対象の映像と、
     前記設定対象を制御するための設定値の入力を補助する画像を表示する設定操作補助域と、
     を前記表示部に表示することを特徴とする印刷機。
    A printing unit for printing on a recording medium;
    A paper feeding unit that supplies the recording medium to the printing unit;
    A reversing unit for reversing the recording surface of the recording medium;
    A paper discharge unit for discharging the recording medium on which printing has been performed by the printing unit;
    A camera that is provided in at least one of the printing unit, the paper feeding unit, the reversing unit, and the paper discharge unit, and images a setting target;
    At least one display unit for displaying information necessary for controlling the setting target;
    Is a printing press to which
    The printing press
    A setting start operation auxiliary area in which an image for assisting an operation of starting the setting target setting is displayed is displayed on the display unit;
    Based on the operation to start the setting target setting,
    The video to be set;
    A setting operation auxiliary area for displaying an image for assisting input of a setting value for controlling the setting object;
    Is displayed on the display unit.
  17.  被記録媒体に印刷を施す印刷機本体に少なくとも1つ設けられて前記印刷機本体の各部を撮像するカメラと、
     前記カメラから取得した映像を表示する表示部と、
     が接続され、かつ、請求項1から請求項15のいずれか一項に記載の設定入力補助装置を含み、
     前記カメラが撮像した映像であって、前記印刷機本体の状態に対応した映像を、強調して前記表示部に表示することを特徴とする印刷機本体モニター装置。
    A camera provided on at least one printing machine main body for printing on a recording medium and imaging each part of the printing machine main body;
    A display unit for displaying video acquired from the camera;
    And a setting input auxiliary device according to any one of claims 1 to 15,
    A printing machine main body monitor apparatus that highlights an image captured by the camera and that corresponds to a state of the printing machine main body and displays the image on the display unit.
  18.  前記印刷機本体の状態に対応した前記映像は、
     前記印刷機本体の現在の状態を示す信号、または、前記印刷機本体を制御するための信号の各種信号に対応した映像であることを特徴とする請求項17に記載の印刷機本体モニター装置。
    The video corresponding to the state of the printing press main body is
    18. The printing machine main body monitoring apparatus according to claim 17, wherein the printing machine main body monitoring device is a video corresponding to a signal indicating a current state of the printing machine main body or various signals of signals for controlling the printing machine main body.
  19.  前記カメラは、前記印刷機本体に複数設けられて、
     前記印刷機本体モニター装置は、前記カメラが撮像した複数の映像のうち、前記印刷機本体の状態に対応した映像を、他の映像よりも強調して前記表示部に表示することを特徴とする請求項17に記載の印刷機本体モニター装置。
    A plurality of the cameras are provided in the printing machine body,
    The printing press main body monitor device displays a video corresponding to a state of the printing press main body among a plurality of videos captured by the camera, and displays the video on the display unit with emphasis over other videos. The printing press main body monitor device according to claim 17.
  20.  複数の前記カメラのうちの少なくとも1つは、前記印刷機本体の給紙部に設けられて前記給紙部を撮像し、
     前記各種信号の一つであって、新しい印刷ジョブを開始するための印刷開始信号が入力されると、
     前記給紙部から前記印刷機本体の印刷部に前記被記録媒体が供給され始めるよりも前に、前記給紙部の映像を他の映像よりも強調して前記表示部に表示することを特徴とする請求項19に記載の印刷機本体モニター装置。
    At least one of the plurality of cameras is provided in a paper feeding unit of the printing press main body and images the paper feeding unit,
    One of the various signals, when a print start signal for starting a new print job is input,
    Before the recording medium starts to be supplied from the paper feeding unit to the printing unit of the printing machine main body, the video of the paper feeding unit is displayed on the display unit with emphasis over other video. The printing press main body monitor device according to claim 19.
  21.  前記印刷機本体の運転中に、前記各種信号の一つであって、前記給紙部に不具合が生じたことを判断するための給紙部不具合発生信号が入力されると、
     前記給紙部を撮像する前記カメラから取得した映像を他の映像よりも強調して前記表示部に表示することを特徴とする請求項20に記載の印刷機本体モニター装置。
    During operation of the printer main body, when one of the various signals and a paper feed unit failure occurrence signal for determining that a failure has occurred in the paper feed unit is input,
    21. The printing machine main body monitoring apparatus according to claim 20, wherein an image acquired from the camera that images the paper feeding unit is displayed on the display unit with emphasis over other images.
  22.  前記印刷機本体の運転中に、前記各種信号の一つであって、前記印刷機本体に不具合が生じたことを判断するための前記信号である不具合発生信号が入力されると、
     前記印刷機本体の部位のうち前記不具合が生じた部位に前記カメラが設けられている場合は、前記不具合が生じた部位を撮像する前記カメラから取得した映像を他の映像よりも強調して前記表示部に表示することを特徴とする請求項19に記載の印刷機本体モニター装置。
    During operation of the printing press main body, when one of the various signals and a failure occurrence signal that is the signal for determining that a failure has occurred in the printing press main body is input,
    In the case where the camera is provided in the part where the defect occurs in the part of the printing press main body, the video acquired from the camera that images the part where the defect occurs is emphasized more than the other video. 20. The printing press main body monitor device according to claim 19, wherein the printing device main body monitor device displays the information on a display unit.
  23.  複数の前記カメラのうちの少なくとも1つは、前記被記録媒体の被記録面を反転させる反転部に設けられて前記反転部を撮像し、
     前記印刷機本体の運転中に、前記各種信号の一つであって、前記反転部に不具合が生じたことを判断するための反転部不具合発生信号が入力されると、
     前記反転部を撮像する前記カメラから取得した映像を他の映像よりも強調して前記表示部に表示することを特徴とする請求項19に記載の印刷機本体モニター装置。
    At least one of the plurality of cameras is provided in an inversion unit that inverts a recording surface of the recording medium and images the inversion unit,
    During operation of the printing press main body, one of the various signals, and when a reversing unit malfunction occurrence signal for determining that a malfunction has occurred in the reversing unit, is input,
    20. The printing press main body monitor device according to claim 19, wherein an image acquired from the camera that images the reversing unit is displayed on the display unit with emphasis over other images.
  24.  複数の前記カメラのうちの少なくとも1つは、前記被記録媒体を排出する排紙部に設けられて前記排紙部を撮像し、
     前記印刷機本体の運転中に、前記各種信号の一つであって、前記排紙部に不具合が生じたことを判断するための排紙部不具合発生信号が入力されると、
     前記排紙部を撮像する前記カメラから取得した映像を他の映像よりも強調して前記表示部に表示することを特徴とする請求項19に記載の印刷機本体モニター装置。
    At least one of the plurality of cameras is provided in a paper discharge unit that discharges the recording medium and images the paper discharge unit,
    During operation of the printing press main body, when one of the various signals and a paper discharge unit failure occurrence signal for determining that a failure has occurred in the paper discharge unit is input,
    20. The printing press main body monitor device according to claim 19, wherein an image acquired from the camera that images the paper discharge unit is displayed on the display unit with emphasis over other images.
  25.  前記各種信号に対応した映像を、前記他の映像よりも拡大して前記表示部に表示することで、前記各種信号に対応した映像を、前記他の映像よりも強調することを特徴とする請求項19に記載の印刷機本体モニター装置。 The video corresponding to the various signals is emphasized more than the other video by enlarging the video corresponding to the various signals more than the other video and displaying the video on the display unit. Item 20. The printing press main body monitor device according to Item 19.
  26.  前記各種信号に対応した映像のみを前記表示部の表示域全体に拡大して表示することで、前記各種信号に対応した映像を、前記他の映像よりも強調することを特徴とする請求項19に記載の印刷機本体モニター装置。 20. The video corresponding to the various signals is emphasized more than the other video by expanding and displaying only the video corresponding to the various signals over the entire display area of the display unit. The printing press main body monitor device described in 1.
  27.  情報を記憶する記憶手段を備え、
     前記カメラが撮像した映像のうちの少なくとも一部を記憶手段に格納することを特徴とする請求項17に記載の印刷機本体モニター装置。
    Comprising storage means for storing information;
    18. The printing press main body monitor device according to claim 17, wherein at least a part of an image captured by the camera is stored in a storage unit.
  28.  前記カメラが撮像した映像のうちの少なくとも一部を、前記印刷機制御装置が接続される通信回線を介して前記印刷機本体モニター装置の外部に提供することを特徴とする請求項17に記載の印刷機本体モニター装置。 18. The apparatus according to claim 17, wherein at least a part of an image captured by the camera is provided to the outside of the printing press main body monitoring device via a communication line to which the printing press control device is connected. Printer monitor unit.
  29.  被記録媒体に印刷を施す印刷部と、
     前記印刷部に前記被記録媒体を供給する給紙部と、
     前記被記録媒体の被記録面を反転させる反転部と、
     前記印刷部で印刷が施された前記被記録媒体を排出する排紙部と、
     前記印刷部と、前記給紙部と、前記反転部と、前記排紙部とのうち少なくとも1つに設けられて対象を撮像するカメラと、
     前記カメラから取得した映像を表示する表示部と、
     が接続される印刷機であって、
     前記印刷機は、
     前記カメラが撮像した映像であって、前記印刷機本体の状態に対応した映像を、強調して前記表示部に表示することを特徴とする印刷機。
    A printing unit for printing on a recording medium;
    A paper feeding unit that supplies the recording medium to the printing unit;
    A reversing unit for reversing the recording surface of the recording medium;
    A paper discharge unit for discharging the recording medium on which printing has been performed by the printing unit;
    A camera that is provided in at least one of the printing unit, the paper feeding unit, the reversing unit, and the paper discharge unit, and images a target;
    A display unit for displaying video acquired from the camera;
    Is a printing press to which
    The printing press
    A printing machine characterized in that an image captured by the camera and corresponding to a state of the printing machine main body is highlighted and displayed on the display unit.
PCT/JP2010/050926 2009-01-23 2010-01-25 Setting input assisting device, printer body monitoring device, and printer WO2010084985A1 (en)

Applications Claiming Priority (6)

Application Number Priority Date Filing Date Title
JP2009013452 2009-01-23
JP2009013451A JP2010167713A (en) 2009-01-23 2009-01-23 Printer body monitor device, printer controller, and printer
JP2009-013452 2009-01-23
JP2009-013451 2009-01-23
JP2010012243A JP2010188722A (en) 2009-01-23 2010-01-22 Setting input aid device, printing machine controller, and printing machine
JP2010-012243 2010-01-22

Publications (1)

Publication Number Publication Date
WO2010084985A1 true WO2010084985A1 (en) 2010-07-29

Family

ID=42356035

Family Applications (1)

Application Number Title Priority Date Filing Date
PCT/JP2010/050926 WO2010084985A1 (en) 2009-01-23 2010-01-25 Setting input assisting device, printer body monitoring device, and printer

Country Status (1)

Country Link
WO (1) WO2010084985A1 (en)

Citations (3)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
JPH0516310U (en) * 1991-08-21 1993-03-02 株式会社小森コーポレーシヨン Monitor device in printing machine
JP2003204544A (en) * 2002-01-08 2003-07-18 Kubota Corp Control system
JP2003282387A (en) * 2002-03-22 2003-10-03 Tokyo Electron Ltd Equipment control system, and control device and method

Patent Citations (3)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
JPH0516310U (en) * 1991-08-21 1993-03-02 株式会社小森コーポレーシヨン Monitor device in printing machine
JP2003204544A (en) * 2002-01-08 2003-07-18 Kubota Corp Control system
JP2003282387A (en) * 2002-03-22 2003-10-03 Tokyo Electron Ltd Equipment control system, and control device and method

Similar Documents

Publication Publication Date Title
US8913283B2 (en) Method for displaying events in printing material processing machines and video-monitored printing machine
JP5744408B2 (en) Image forming apparatus
JP4740665B2 (en) Image recording device
US20070035605A1 (en) Jam processing apparatus for printer and method thereof
JP2011245792A (en) Image forming system
US9187279B2 (en) Printing device
AU2019203552B2 (en) Information processing device, image forming system, and program
JP2015104878A (en) Print control device, method and program
JP2012089922A (en) Image reading device
US20120069114A1 (en) Image forming apparatus and image forming method
WO2010135948A1 (en) Scanning-printing integrated apparatus
WO2010084985A1 (en) Setting input assisting device, printer body monitoring device, and printer
JP2010188722A (en) Setting input aid device, printing machine controller, and printing machine
JP2009012266A (en) Image recorder
JP2003154710A (en) Printer
EP3575092B1 (en) Recording apparatus
JP2002348011A (en) Recording device
JP7268376B2 (en) Media processing device control method, recording system control method, media processing device, and recording system
JP2009274321A (en) Inkjet printing apparatus
JP2010167713A (en) Printer body monitor device, printer controller, and printer
JP2011098520A (en) Image recording apparatus, and control method of image recording apparatus
US9579910B2 (en) Recording apparatus and inspection method
US20090140487A1 (en) Option-type paper feeding device
JP2000318261A (en) Printing apparatus
JP6676978B2 (en) Printing apparatus and transport method

Legal Events

Date Code Title Description
121 Ep: the epo has been informed by wipo that ep was designated in this application

Ref document number: 10733591

Country of ref document: EP

Kind code of ref document: A1

NENP Non-entry into the national phase

Ref country code: DE

122 Ep: pct application non-entry in european phase

Ref document number: 10733591

Country of ref document: EP

Kind code of ref document: A1